\ 


f 


CONCERNING 

THE 

EARTHS 

inr 

OUR  SOLAR  SYSTEM, 

WHICH  ARE  CALLED 

PLANETS, 

AND  CONCERNING  THE 

EARTHS  m  THE  STARRT  HEAVEN. 

TOGETHER  WITH 

AN  ACCOUNT  OF  THEIR  INHABITANTS, 

AND  ALSO  or  THE 

SPIRITS  AND  ANGELS  THERE, 

FROM  WHAT  HAS  BEEN  SEEN  AND  HEARD. 


TBANSLiTED  FROM  THE  LATIN  OF 

EMANUEL^  SWEDENBORG. 

Published  at  London  by  the  Author,  in  1758. 


BOSTON: 
ADONIS  HOWARD 

1828. 


Press  of  the  New  Jerusalem  Magazine. 

FREEMAN  &  BOLLES,  PRINT. 


CONTENTS. 


Page 

Introduction,  ....  1 

Concerning  the  Earth  or  Planet  Mercury,  its  Spirits 

and  Inhabitants,  ....  8 

Concerning  the  Earth  or  Planet  Jupiter,  its  Spirits 

and  Inhabitants,  -  -  -  43 

Concerning  the  Earth  or  Planet  Mars,  its  Spirits  and 

Inhabitants,  ....  91 

Concerning  the  Earth  or  Planet  Saturn,  its  Spirits 

and  Inhabitants,  -  -  -  -  112 

Concerning  the  Earth  or  Planet  Venus,  its  Spirits  and 

Inhabitants,  •  -  -  -  118 

The  Reasons  why  the  Lord  was  willing  to  be  born 

on  our  earth,  and  not  on  another,  -  -  124 

Concerning  the  Earths  in  the  Starry  Heaven,  -  130 
Concerning  the  First  Earth  in  the  Starry  Heaven,  its 

Spirit?  and  Inhabitants,  ...  136 

Concerning  a  Second  Earth  in  the  Starry  Heaven,  its 

Spirits  and  Inhabitants,  ...  147 

Concerning  a  Third  Earth  in  the  Starry  Heaven,  its 

Spirits  and  Inhabitants,  ...  153 

Concerning  a  Fourth  Earth  in  the  Stari-y  Heaven,  its 

Spirits  and  Inhabitants,  -  -  -  161 

Concerning  a  Fifth  Earth  in  the  Stari-y  Heaven,  its 

Spirits  and  inhabitants,         -         -         -  179 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2014 


https://archive.org/details/concerningearthsOOswed 


CONCERING  THE 


EARTHS  IN  THE  UNIVERSE. 


1.  Inasmuch  as,  by  the  divine  mercy  of  the 
Lord,  things  interior  are  open  to  me,  which 
appertain  to  my  spirit,  and  thereby  it  has  been 
granted  me  to  discourse  not  only  with  spirits 
and  angels  who  are  near  our  earth,  but  also 
with  those  who  are  near  other  earths  ;  and 
whereas  I  had  a  desire  to  know  whether  other 
earths  exist,  and  of  what  sort  they  are,  and 
what  is  the  nature  and  quality  of  their  inhabit- 
ants, therefore  it  has  been  granted  me  of  the 
Lord,  to  discourse  and  converse  with  spirits 
and  angels  who  are  from  other  earths,  with 
some  for  a  day,  with  some  for  a  week,  and  with 
some  for  months,  and  to  be  instructed  by  them 
concerning  the  earths,  from  which  and  near 
which  they  were,  and  concerning  the  lives, 
customs,  and  worship  of  the  inhabitants  thereof, 
with  various  other  things  worthy  to  be  noted  : 
And  whereas  in  this  manner  it  has  been  granted 
me  to  become  acquainted  with  such  things,  it 
is  permitted  to  describe  them  according  to  what 
has  been  heard  and  seen.  It  is  to  be  observed, 
1 


2 


that  all  spirits  and  angels  are  from  the  human 
race  ;  (a)  and  that  they  are  near  their  respective 
earths ;  (b)  and  that  they  are  acquainted  with 
things  on  those  earths ;  and  that  by  them  man 
may  be  instructed,  if  his  interiors  be  so  open, 
as  to  be  enabled  to  speak  and  converse  with 
them  ;  for  man  in  his  essence  is  a  spirit,  (c)  and 
together  with  spirits  as  to  his  interiors;  (d) 
wherefore  he,  whose  interiors  are  opened  by  the 
Lord,  may  discourse  with  them,  as  man  with 
man ;  (e)  which  privilege  has  been  granted 
me  now  for  twelve  years  daily. 

Extracts  from  the  Arcana  Coelestia. 

(a)  That  there  are  no  spirits  and  angels,  but 
what  were  of  the  human  race,  n.  1880. 

(b)  That  the  spirits  of  everj-  earth  are  near  to 
their  own  particular  earth,  because  they  are  from 
the  inhabitants  of  that  earth,  and  of  a  similar 
genius  and  temper;  and  that  they  are  serviceable 
to  those  inhabitants,  u.  9968. 

(c)  That  the  soul,  which  lives  after  death,  is 
the  spirit  of  man,  w  hich  is  the  real  man  in  him, 
and  also  appears  in  another  life  in  a  perfect  hu- 
man form,  n.  322,  1880,  1881,  3633,  4622,  4735, 
6054,  6605,  6626,  7021,  10594. 

(d)  That  man,  even  during  his  abode  in  the 
world,  as  to  his  interiors,  consequently  as  to  his 
spirit  or  soul,  is  in  the  midst  of  spirits  and  angels, 
of  a  nature  and  quality  agreeing  to  his  own,  n. 
2378,  3645,  4067,  4073,  4077. 

(e)  That  man  is  capable  of  discoursing  with 
spirits  and  angels,  and  that  tlie  ancients  on  our 


3 


2.  That  there  are  several  earths,  and  men 
upon  them,  and  thence  spirits  and  angels,  is  a 
thing  most  perfectly  well  known  in  another  life, 
for  it  is  there  granted  to  every  one,  who  desires 
it  from  a  love  of  truth  and  consequent  use,  to 
discourse  with  the  spirits  of  other  earths,  and 
thereby  to  be  confirmed  concerning  a  plurality 
of  worlds,  and  to  be  informed,  that  the  human 
race  is  not  confined  to  one  earth  only,  but  ex- 
tends to  earths  innumerable ;  and  moreover  to 
know,  what  is  the  particular  genius,  manner  of 
life,  and  also  divine  worship,  prevailing  amongst 
the  inhabitants  of  each  particular  earth. 

3.  I  have  occasionally  discoursed  on  this  sub- 
ject with  the  spirits  of  our  earth,  and  the  result 
of  our  conversation  was,  that  any  man,  of  an 
enlarged  understanding,  may  conclude  from 
various  considerations,  that  there  are  several 
earths,  and  that  they  are  inhabited  by  men;  for 
it  is  a  suggestion  of  reason,  that  so  great  mate- 
rial masses  as  the  planets  are,  some  of  which  far 
exceed  this  earth  in  magnitude,  are  not  empty 
masses,  and  created  only  to  be  conveyed  in 
their  revolutions  round  the  sun,  and  to  shine 
with  their  scanty  light  for  the  benefit  of  one 

earth  did  frequently  discourse  with  them,  n.  67, 
68,  69,  ,784,  1634,  1636,  7802.  But  that  at  this 
day  it  is  dangerous  to  discourse  witli  them,  unless 
man  be  in  a  true  faith,  and  be  led  of  the  Lord, 
n.  784,  9438, 10751. 


4 


earth,  but  that  their  use  must  needs  be  more 
enlarged  and  distinguished.  He  who  believes, 
as  every  one  ought  to  beheve,  that  the  Deity- 
created  the  universe  for  no  other  end,  than  that 
mankind,  and  thereby  heaven,  might  have  ex- 
istence, (for  mankind  is  the  seminary  of  hea- 
ven,) must  needs  believe  also,  that  vi^heresoever 
there  is  any  earth,  there  likewise  are  men-in- 
habitants. That  the  planets,  which  are  visible 
to  our  eyes,  as  being  within  the  boundaries  of 
this  solar  system,  are  earths,  may  appear  man- 
ifest from  this  consideration,  that  they  are  bo- 
dies of  earthy  matter,  because  they  reflect  the 
light  of  the  sun,  and  when  seen  through  opti- 
cal glasses,  they  appear  not  as  stars  glittering 
by  reason  of  their  flame,  but  as  earths  varie- 
gated by  reason  of  their  opaque  spots.  The 
same  may  further  appear  from  this  considera- 
tion, that  they,  in  like  manner  as  our  earth,  are 
conveyed  by  a  progressive  motion  round  the 
sun,  in  the  way  of  the  zodiac,  whence  they 
have  their  years,  and  seasons  of  the  year,  as 
Spring,  Summer,  Autumn,  and  Winter;  and  in 
like  manner  revolve  about  their  own  axis, 
whence  they  have  their  days,  and  times  of  the 
day,  as  morning,  mid-day,  evening,  and  night; 
moreover  some  of  them  have  moons,  which 
are  called  satellites,  and  which  perform  their 
revolutions  round  their  central  globes,  as  the 
moon  does  round  our  earth ;  the  planet  Saturn 


5 


lias  besides  a  large  luminous  belt,  as  being  fur- 
thest distant  from  the  sun,  which  belt  supplies 
that  earth  with  much  light,  although  reflected. 
How  is  it  possible  for  any  reasonable  person, 
acquainted  with  these  circumstances,  to  assert, 
that  such  bodies  are  void  and  without  inhabit- 
ants? 

4.  Moreover  in  my  discourse  with  spirits  I 
have  at  such  times  suggested,  that  it  is  very 
credible  that  in  the  universe  there  are  more 
earths  than  one,  from  this  consideration,  that 
the  starry  heaven  is  so  immense,  and  the  stars 
therein  are  so  innumerable,  each  of  which  in 
its  place,  or  in  its  world,  is  a  sun,  and  like  our 
sun,  in  various  magnitude.  Every  consider- 
ate person  is  led  to  conclude,  that  so  immense 
a  wbole  must  needs  be  a  means  to  some  end, 
the  ultimate  of  creation,  which  end  is  the  king- 
dom of  heaven,  wherein  the  Divine  may  dwell 
with  angels  and  men ;  for  the  visible  universe, 
or  the  heaven  resplendent  with  stars  so  innu- 
merable, which  are  so  many  suns,  is  only  a 
means,  or  medium,  for  the  existence  of  earths, 
and  of  men  upon  them,  of  whom  may  be  form- 
ed a  celestial  kingdom.  From  these  consider- 
ations every  reasonable  person  must  needs  be 
led  to  conceive,  that  so  immense  a  means, 
adapted  to  so  great  an  end,  was  not  constituted 
for  a  raceof  rpen  from  one  earth  only,  and  for 
a  heaven  thence  derived ;  for  what  would  this 
2 


6 


be  to  the  Divine  which  is  infinite,  and  to  which 
thousands,  yea  ten  thousands  of  earths,  all  full 
of  inhabitants,  are  comparatively  small,  and 
scarce  of  any  amount ! 

5.  Moreover  the  angelic  heaven  is  so  im- 
mense, that  it  corresponds  with  all  and  singu- 
lar the  things  appertaining  to  man,  myriads 
corresponding  to  every  member  and  organ, 
and  to  all  the  viscera,  and  the  respective  af- 
fections of  each  ;  and  it  has  been  given  to  know, 
that  that  heaven,  as  to  all  its  correspondences, 
can  by  no  means  exist,  except  by  the  inhabit- 
ants of  very  many  earths.  (/) 

6.  There  are  spirits,  whose  sole  study  is  to 
acquire  to  themselves  knowledges,  because 
they  are  delighted  only  with  knowledges ;  these 

(/)  That  heaven  corresponds  to  the  Lord,  and 
that  man,  as  to  all  and  sinscular  the  things  apper- 
taining to  him,  corresponds  to  heaven,  and  that 
hence  heaven,  before  the  Lord,  is  a  man  in  a 
large  effigy,  and  may  be  called  the  grand  man, 
n.  2996,  2998, 3624  to  3649,  3636  to  3643, 3741  to 
3745,  4625.  Concerning  the  correspondence  of 
man,  and  of  all  things  appertaining  to  him,  with 
the  grand  man,  which  is  heaven,  in  general,  from 
experience,  n.  3021,  3624  to  3649,  3741  to  3751, 
3883,  to  3896,  4039  to  4051,  4218  to  4228, 4318 
to  4331,  4403  to  4421,  4527  to  4533,  4622  to 
4633,  4652  to  4660,  4791  to  4805,  4931  to  4953, 
5050  to  5061,  5171  to  5189,  537?  to  5396,  5552 
to  5573,  5711  to  5727,  10030. 


7 


spirits  are  permitted  to  wander  at  large,  and 
even  to  pass  out  of  this  solar  system  into  oth- 
ers, and  to  procure  for  themselves  knowledges : 
These  have  declared,  that  there  are  not  only- 
earths  inhabited  by  men,  in  this  solar  system, 
but  also  out  of  it  in  the  starry  heaven,  to  an 
immense  number.  These  spirits  are  from  the 
planet  Mercury. 

7.  As  to  what  in  general  concerns  the  Di- 
vine worship  of  the  inhabitants  of  other  earths, 
such  amongst  them  as  are  not  idolaters,  all 
acknowledge  the  Lord  to  be  the  only  God ; 
for  they  adore  the  Divine  not  as  invisible,  but 
as  visible,  for  this  reason  amongst  others,  be- 
cause when  the  Divine  appears  to  them,  he 
appears  in  an  human  form,  as  he  also  formerly 
appeared  to  Abraham  and  others  on  this 
earth;  (g)  and  they  who  adore  the  Divine  un- 
der an  human  form  are  all  accepted  of  the 


(g)  That  the  inhabitants  of  all  the  earths 
adore  the  Divine  under  an  human  form,  conse- 
quently the  Lord,  n.  8541  to  8547,  10159, 10736, 
10737,  10738.  And  that  they  rejoice  when  they 
hear  that  God  was  actually  made  man,  n.  9361. 
That  it  is  impossible  to  think  of  God  except  in 
an  human  form,  n.  8705,  9359,  9972.  That  man 
may  worship  and  love  what  he  has  some  idea  of, 
but  not  what  he  has  no  idea  of,  n.  4733,  5110, 
5633,7211,9267,  10067. 


3 


8 


Lord,  (h)  They  say  also,  that  no  one  can 
rightly  worship  God,  much  less  be  joined  to 
him,  unless  he  comprehends  him  by  some 
idea,  and  that  God  cannot  be  comprehended 
except  in  an  human  form  ;  and  if  he  be  not  so 
comprehended,  the  interior  sight,  which  is  of 
the  thought,  concerning  God,  is  dissipated,  as 
the  sight  of  the  eye  is  when  looking  upon  the 
boundless  universe;  and  that  in  this  case  the 
thought  must  needs  sink  into  nature,  and  wor- 
ship nature  instead  of  God. 

8.  When  they  were  told  that  the  Lord  on 
our  earth  assumed  the  human,  they  mused 
awhile,  and  presently  said,  that  it  was  done  for 
the  salvation  of  the  human  race. 


Concerning  the  Earth  or  Planet  Mercury,  its 
Spirits  and  Inhabitants. 

9.  That  the  universal  heaven  resembles 
one  man,  who  is  therefore  called  the  Grand 
Man,  and  that  all  and  singular  the  things  ap- 
pertaining to  man,  both  his  exteriors  and  inte- 
riors, correspond  to  that  man  or  heaven,  is  an 
arcanum  not  as  yet  known  in  the  world ;  but 
that  it  is  so,  has  been  abundantly  proved.  (/) 

(h)  That  the  Lord  receives  all  who  are  princi- 
pled in  good,  and  who  adore  the  Divine  under  an 
human  form,  n.  9359,  7173. 


9 


To  constitute  that  Grand  Man,  there  is  need 
of  spirits  from  several  earths,  those  who  come 
from  our  earth  into  heaven  not  being  sufiicient 
for  this  purpose,  being  respectively  few;  and 
it  is  provided  of  the  Lord,  that  whensoever 
there  be  a  deficiency  in  any  place  as  to  the 
quality  or  quantity  of  correspondence,  a  sup- 
ply be  instantly  made  from  another  earth,  to 
fill  up  the  deficiency,  that  so  the  proportion 
may  be  preserved,  and  thus  heaven  be  kept  in 
due  consistence. 

10.  It  was  also  discovered  to  me  from  hea- 
ven, in  what  relation  to  the  Grand  Man  the 
spirits  from  the  planet  Mercury  stand,  viz.  that 
they  have  relation  to  the  memory,  but  to  the 
memory  of  things  abstracted  from  terrestrial 
and  merely  material  objects.  Since  however 
it  has  been  granted  to  discourse  with  them, 
and  this  during  several  weeks,  and  to  learn 
their  nature  and  quality,  and  to  observe  how 
the  inhabitants  of  that  earth  are  particularly 
circumstanced,  I  shall  adduce  what  has  been 
thus  experimentally  made  known  to  me. 

1 1 .  On  a  time  some  spirits  came  to  me,  and 
it  was  declared  from  heaven,  that  they  were 
from  the  earth  which  is  nearest  to  the  sun,  and 
which  in  our  earth  is  known  by  the  name  of 
the  planet  Mercury ;  immediately  on  their  com- 
ing, they  explored  my  memory  in  search  of  all 
that  1  knew;  (spirits  can  do  this  most  dexter- 


10 


ously,  for  when  they  come  to  man,  they  see  in 
his  memory  all  things  contained  therein :)  (i) 
During  their  search  after  various  things,  and 
amongst  others,  after  the  cities  and  places 
where  1  had  heen,  I  observed,  that  they  had 
no  inclination  to  know  any  thing  of  temples, 
palaces,  houses,  or  streets,  but  only  of  those 
things  which  I  knew  were  transacted  in  those 
places,  also  of  whatever  related  to  the  rule  and 
government  therein  prevailing,  and  to  the  tem- 
pers and  manners  of  the  inhabitants,  with  other 
things  of  a  similar  nature  ;  for  such  things  co- 
here with  places  in  man's  memory,  wherefore 
when  the  places  are  excited  in  remembrance, 
those  things  also  are  brought  to  view  at  the 
same  time.  I  was  much  surprised  to  find 
them  of  such  a  nature  and  quality,  wherefore 
I  asked  them,  why  they  disregarded  the  mag- 
nificence of  the  places,  and  only  attended  to 
the  things  and  circumstances  connected  there- 
with ?  They  answered,  because  they  had  no 
delight  in  looking  at  things  material,  corporeal 
and  terrestrial,  but  only  at  things  real :  hence 

(i)  That  spirits  enter  into  all  the  things  of 
man's  memory,  n.  2488,  5863,  6192,  6193,  6198, 
6199,  6214.  That  angels  enter  into  the  affec- 
tions and  ends,  from  which,  and  for  the  sake  of 
which,  man  thinks,  wills,  and  acts  in  such  and 
such  a  manner,  in  preference  to  every  other,  n. 
1317,  1645,  5844. 


11 


it  was  confirmed,  that  the  spirits  of  that  earth, 
in  the  Grand  Man,  have  relation  to  the  mem- 
ory of  things  abstracted  from  what  is  material 
and  terrestrial. 

12.  It  was  told  me,  that  such  is  the  life  of 
the  inhabitants  of  that  earth,  viz.  that  they 
have  no  concern  about  things  terrestrial  and 
material,  but  only  about  the  statutes,  laws,  and 
forms  of  government,  which  prevail  amongst 
the  nations  therein  ;  also  about  the  things  of 
heaven,  which  are  innumerable  :  and  I  was  fur- 
ther informed,  that  several  of  the  men  of  that 
earth  converse  with  spirits,  and  that  thence 
they  have  the  knowledges  of  spiritual  things, 
and  of  the  states  of  life  after  death;  and  thence 
also  their  contempt  of  things  corporeal  and 
terrestrial ;  for  they  who  know  of  a  certainty, 
and  believe  that  they  shall  live  after  death,  are 
concerned  about  heavenly  things,  as  being 
eternal  and  happy,  but  not  about  worldly 
things,  only  so  far  as  the  necessities  of  hfe  re- 
quire. Inasmuch  as  the  inhabitants  of  the 
planet  Mercury  are  of  such  a  nature  and  qual- 
ity, therefore  also  the  spirits,  who  are  from 
thence,  are  of  a  like  nature  and  quality,  (b) 

13.  With  what  eagerness  they  inquire  into 
and  imbibe  the  knowledges  of  things,  such  as 
appertain  to  the  memory  elevated  above  the 
sensualities  of  the  body,  was  made  manifest  to 
me  from  this  circumstance,  that  when  they 


12 


looked  into  those  things  which  I  knew  respect- 
ing heavenly  subjects,  they  passed  hastily 
through  them  all,  declaring  every  instant  the 
nature  and  quality  of  each  :  for  when  spirits 
come  to  man,  they  enter  into  all  his  memory, 
and  excite  thence  whatever  suits  themselves; 
yea,  what  1  have  often  observed,  they  read  the 
things  contained  therein,  as  out  of  a  book,  (k) 
These  spirits  did  this  with  greater  dexterity 
and  expedition,  because  they  did  not  stop  at 
such  things  as  are  heavy  and  slugglish,  and 
which  confine,  and  consequently  retard  the  in- 
ternal sight,  as  all  terrestrial  and  corporeal 
things  do,  when  regarded  as  ends,  that  is, 
when  alone  loved  ;  but  they  looked  into  things 
essential ;  for  such  things,  which  are  not  clog- 
ged with  things  terrestrial,  elevate  the  mind 
upwards,  whereas  mere  material  things  sink 
the  mind  downwards,  and  at  the  same  time 
contract  and  shut  it  up.  Their  eagerness  to 
acquire  knowledges,  and  to  enrich  the  memory, 
was  manifest  also  from  the  following  circum- 
stance :  on  a  time  whilst  1  was  writing  some- 
what concerning  things  to  come,  and  they 
were  at  a  distance,  so  that  they  could  not  look 
into  those  things  from  my  memory,  because  I 


(k)  That  the  spirits,  who  are  attendant  on 
man,  are  in  possession  of  all  things  appertaining 
to  his  memory,  n.  5853,  6857,  5859,  5860. 


13 


was  not  willing  to  read  them  in  their  presence, 
they  were  very  indignant,  and  contrary  to  their 
usual  behaviour,  they  were  desirous  to  abuse 
me,  saying  that  I  was  one  of  the  worst  of  men, 
with  such  hke  indignities ;  and  that  they  might 
give  a  proof  of  their  resentment,  they  caused 
a  kind  of  contraction  attended  with  pain  on  the 
right  side  of  my  head  even  to  the  ear  ;  but 
these  things  did  not  hurt  me  ;  nevertheless,  in 
consequence  of  having  done  evil,  they  removed 
themselves  to  a  yet  greater  distance,  but  pre- 
sently they  stood  still  again,  desirous  to  know 
what  I  had  written  :  such  is  their  eager  thirst 
after  knowledges. 

14.  The  spirits  of  Mercury,  above  all  other 
spirits,  possess  the  knowledges  of  things,  as 
well  respecting  this  solar  system,  as  respecting 
the  earths  which  are  in  the  starry  heaven ;  and 
what  they  have  once  acquired  to  themselves, 
that  they  retain,  and  also  recollect  it,  as  often 
as  any  thing  similar  occurs  :  hence  also  it  may 
appear  manifest,  that  spirits  have  memory,  and 
that  it  is  much  more  perfect  than  the  memory 
of  men;  and  further,  that  what  they  hear,  see, 
and  perceive,  they  retain,  and  especially  such 
things  as  delight  them,  as  these  spirits  are  de- 
lighted with  knowledges  ;  for  whatever  things 
cause  delight,  and  affect  the  love,  these  flow 
in  as  it  were  spontaneously,  and  remain  ;  other 
things  do  not  enter,  but  only  touch  the  surface, 
and  pass  by. 


14 


15.  When  the  spirits  of  Mercury  come  to 
other  societies,  they  explore  and  collect  from 
them  what  they  know,  and  then  they  depart ; 
for  such  communication  is  granted  amongst 
spirits,  and  especially  amongst  angels,  that  when 
they  are  in  a  society,  if  they  are  accepted  and 
loved,  all  things  which  they  know  are  commu- 
nicated. (I) 

16.  In  consequence  of  their  knowledges,  the 
spirits  of  Mercury  have  an  extraordinary  degree 
of  haughtiness  ;  wherefore  they  are  given  to 
understand,  that  although  they  know  innumer- 
able things,  yet  there  are  infinite  things  which 
they  do  not  know;  and  that  if  their  knowledges 
should  increase  to  eternity,  the  notice  even  of 
all  general  or  common  things  would  still  be  un- 
attainable; they  are  told  likewise  of  their 
haughtiness  and  highmindedness,  and  how 
misbecoming  such  a  temper  is ;  but  on  such 
occasions  they  reply,  that  it  is  not  haughtiness, 
but  only  a  glorying  by  reason  of  the  faculty  of 
their  memory  ;  thus  they  have  the  art  of  excul- 
pating themselves,  and  excusing  their  foibles. 

17.  They  are  averse  to  discourse  consisting 
of  vocal  expressions,  because  it  is  material, 

(I)  That  in  the  heavens  there  is  given  a  com- 
munication of  all  good  things,  inasmuch  as  it  is 
the  property  of  heavenly  love  to  communicate  all 
Jts  possessions  with  others ;  and  that  hence  the 
angels  derive  wisdom  and  happifiess,  n.  649,  550, 
1390, 1391,  1399,  10130,  10723. 


15 


wherefore  when  I  conversed  with  them  with- 
out intermediate  spirits,  I  could  only  do  it  by 
a  species  of  active  thought.  Their  memory, 
as  consisting  of  things,  not  of  images  purely 
material,  affords  a  nearer  supply  of  its  objects 
to  the  thinking  principle;  for  the  thinking  prin- 
ciple, which  is  above  the  imagination,  requires 
for  its  objects  things  abstracted  from  material : 
but  notwithstanding  this,  the  spirits  of  ^Mercury 
are  little  distinguished  for  their  judgment,  hav- 
ing no  delight  in  the  exercise  of  that  faculty, 
and  the  deducing  of  conclusions  from  know- 
ledges; for  bare  knowledges  alone  are  the 
things  which  give  them  pleasure. 

18.  They  were  questioned,  whether  they 
proposed  to  themselves  any  use  from  their 
knowledges;  and  at  the  same  time  it  was  re- 
presented to  them,  that  it  is  not  enough  to  be 
delighted  with  knowledges,  because  knowledges 
have  res|)ect  to  uses,  and  uses  ought  to  be  the 
ends  of  knowledges;  from  knowledges  alone  no 
use  results  to  them,  but  to  others  with  whom 
they  are  disposed  to  communicate  their  know- 
ledges ;  and  that  it  is  very  inexpedient  for  any 
one,  who  wishes  to  become  wise,  to  rest  satis- 
fied with  mere  knowledges,  these  being  only 
administering  causes,  intended  to  be  subservi- 
ent to  the  investigation  of  things  appertaining 
to  life:  but  they  replied,  that  they  were  de- 
lighted with  knowledges,  and  that  knowledges 
to  them  are  uses. 


16 


19.  Some  of  them  also  are  unwilling  to  ap- 
pear as  men,  like  the  spirits  of  other  earths, 
and  would  rather  appear  as  crystalline  globes; 
the  reason  why  they  are  desirous  to  appear  so, 
although  they  do  not  appear  so,  is,  because  the 
knowledges  of  things  immaterial  are  represent- 
ed in  another  life  by  crystals. 

20.  The  spirits  of  Mercury  differ  totally 
from  the  spirits  of  our  earth,  for  the  spirits  of 
our  earth  have  not  so  much  concern  about  im- 
material things,  but  about  worldly,  corporeal, 
and  terrestrial  things,  which  are  material; 
wherefore  the  spirits  of  Mercury  cannot  abide 
together  with  the  spirits  of  our  earth,  and  of 
consequence,  wheresoever  they  meet  them,  they 
fly  away;  for  the  spiritual  spheres,  which  are 
exhaled  from  each,  are  altogether  contrary  tiie 
one  to  the  other.  The  spirits  of  Mercury  have 
a  common  saying,  that  they  have  no  inchnation 
to  look  at  a  sheath,  but  at  things  stripped  of 
their  sheath,  that  is,  at  interior  things. 

21.  On  a  time  there  appeared  a  whitish  co- 
loured flame,  which  burnt  briskly,  and  this  for 
nearly  an  hour;  that  flame  signified  the  ap- 
proach of  spirits  of  Mercury,  who  for  penetra- 
tion, thought,  and  speech,  were  more  prompt 
than  the  former  spirits :  when  they  were  come, 
they  instantly  ran  through  the  things  contained 
in  my  memory,  but  I  could  not  perceive  what 
observations  they  made,  by  reason  of  their 


17 


promptitude;  I  heard  them  afterwards  express 
the  nature  and  quality  of  some  particulars;  in 
respect  to  what  I  had  seen  in  the  heavens  and  in 
the  world  of  spirits,  they  said  that  they  knew 
those  things  before :  I  perceived  that  a  multi- 
tude of  spirits  consociated  with  them  was  behind 
a  little  to  the  left  in  the  plane  of  the  Occiput. 

22.  At  another  time  I  saw  a  multitude  of 
such  spirits,  but  at  some  distance  from  me,  in 
front  a  little  to  the  right,  and  thence  they  dis- 
coursed with  me,  but  by  means  of  intermediate 
spirits ;  for  their  speech  was  as  quick  as  thought, 
which  does  not  fall  into  human  speech,  but  by 
means  of  other  spirits;  and  what  surprised  me, 
they  spake  not  singly,  but  in  a  volume  together 
( volumatim,)  and  yet  readily  and  rapidly  :  their 
speech,  appeared  undulatory,  in  consequence 
of  the  numbers  who  spake  at  the  same  time, 
and  what  is  remarkable,  it  was  conveyed  to- 
wards my  left  eye,  although  they  were  to  the 
right;  the  reason  was,  because  the  left  eye  cor- 
responds to  the  knowledges  of  things  abstract- 
ed from  what  is  material,  consequently  to  such 
things  as  appertain  to  intelligence,  whereas 
the  right  eye  corresponds  to  such  things  as  ap- 
pertain to  wisdom,  (m)    They  likewise  per- 

(m)  That  the  eye  corresponds  to  the  under- 
standing, because  the  understanding  is  internal 
sight,  and  the  sight  or  things  immaterial,  n.  2701, 
4410,  4526,  9051,  10569.    That  the  sight  of  the 
4 


IS 


ceived  and  judged  of  what  they  heard  with  the 
same  promptitude  with  which  they  discoursed, 
saying  ofsuch  a  thing  tliat  it  was  so,  and  of  such 
a  thing  that  it  was  )iot  so;  their  judgment  was 
as  it  were  instantaneous. 

23.  There  was  a  spirit  from  another  earth, 
who  was  well  qualified  to  discourse  with  them, 
being  a  quick  and  ready  speaker,  but  who  af- 
fected elegance  in  his  discourse ;  they  instantly 
decided  on  whatever  he  spake,  saying  of  this, 
that  it  was  too  elegant,  of  that,  that  it  was  too 
polished ;  so  that  the  sole  thing  they  attended 
to  was,  whether  they  could  hear  any  thing  from 
him  which  they  had  never  known  before,  reject- 
ing thus  the  things  which  were  as  shades  to  the 
substance  of  the  discourse,  as  all  affections  of 
elegance  and  erudition  especially  are,  for  these 
hide  the  real  things,  and  instead  thereof  present 
expressions,  which  are  only  material  forms  of 
things;  for  the  speaker  keeps  the  attention  fix- 
ed herein,  and  is  desirous  that  his  expressions 
should  be  regarded  more  than  the  meaning  of 
them,  whereby  the  ears  are  affected  more  than 
the  minds  of  the  audience. 

24.  The  spirits  of  the  earth  Mercury  do  not 


left  eye  corresponds  to  truths,  consequently  to 
hitelligence,  and  the  sight  of  the  right  eye  corres- 
ponds to  the  goods  of  truth,  consequently  to  wis 
dom,  n.  4410. 


19 


abide  long  in  one  place,  or  within  companies  of 
the  spirits  of  one  world,  but  wander  through 
the  universe ;  the  reason  is,  because  they  have 
relation  to  the  memory  of  things,  which  memo- 
ry must  be  continually  stored  with  fresh  sup- 
plies; hence  it  is  granted  them  to  wander  about, 
and  to  acquire  to  themselves  knowledges  in 
every  place.  During  their  sojourning  in  this 
manner,  if  they  meet  with  spirits  who  love  ma- 
terial things,  that  is,  things  corporeal  and  ter- 
restrial, they  avoid  their  company,  and  be- 
betake  themselves  were  such  things  are  no  sub- 
jects of  discourse.  Hence  it  may  appear,  that 
their  mind  is  elevated  above  things  of  sense, 
and  thus  that  they  are  in  an  interior  luminous 
principle :  this  was  also  given  me  actually  to 
perceive,  whilst  they  were  near  me,  and  dis- 
coursed with  me ;  I  observed  at  such  times, 
that  I  was  withdrawn  from  things  of  sense, 
insomuch  that  the  luminous  principle  of  exter- 
nal vision  began  to  grow  dull  and  obscure. 

25.  The  spirits  of  that  earth  go  in  compan- 
ies and  phalanxes,  and  when  assembled  togeth- 
er, they  form  as  it  were  a  globe  ;  thus  they  are 
joined  together  by  the  Lord,  that  they  may  act 
in  unity,  and  that  the  knowledges  of  each  may 
be  communicated  wilh  all,  and  the  knowledges 
of  all  with  each,  as  is  the  case  in  Heaven. (/) 
That  they  wander  through  the  universe  to  ac- 
quire the  knowledges  of  tilings,  appeared  to  me 


20 


also  from  this  circumstance,  that  once,  when 
they  appeared  very  remote  from  me,  they  dis- 
coursed with  me  thence,  and  said,  that  they 
were  then  gathered  together,  and  journeying 
out  of  tlie  sphere  of  this  world  into  the  starry 
heaven,  where  they  knew  such  spirits  existed, 
as  had  no  concern  about  terrestrial  and  corpo- 
real things,  but  only  about  things  elevated  above 
them,  and  that  they  were  desirous  to  associate 
with  those  spirits.  It  was  given  to  understand, 
that  they  themselves  do  not  know  whither  they 
are  journeying,  but  that  they  are  led  by  the 
divine  guidance  to  those  places,  where  they 
may  be  instructed  concerning  such  things  as 
they  are  yet  unacquainted  with,  and  which 
agree  with  the  knowledges  that  they  have  al- 
ready :  it  was  given  to  understand  further,  that 
they  do  not  know  how  to  find  the  companies 
with  whom  they  are  joined  together,  and  that 
this  also  is  of  divine  direction. 

26.  In  consequence  of  their  thus  journey- 
ing through  the  universe,  and  thereby  being 
enabled  to  know  more  than  others  respecting 
the  worlds  and  earths  out  of  the  sphere  of  our 
solar  system,  I  have  also  discoursed  with  them 
on  this  subject;  they  said  that  in  the  universe 
there  are  very  many  earths  inhabited  by  men; 
and  that  they  wonder  how  any  should  suppose 
(whom  they  called  men  of  little  judgment)  that 
the  heaven  of  the  omnipotent  God  consisted 


21 


only  of  spirits  and  angels  who  come  from  one 
earth,  when  these  comparatively  are  so  few, 
that  in  respect  to  the  omnipotence  of  God  they 
are  scarce  any  thing,  nor  would  it  alter  the  case 
even  supposing  there  were  myriads  of  worlds, 
and  myriads  of  earths:  they  declared,  more- 
over, that  they  knew  there  were  earths  exist- 
ing in  the  universe  to  the  number  of  some 
hundred  thousands  and  upwards;  and  yet  what 
is  this  to  the  Divine  which  is  infinite  ? 

27.  The  spirits  of  Mercury,  who  were  at- 
tendant upon  me,  whilst  I  was  writing  and  ex- 
plaining the  Word  as  to  its  internal  sense,  and 
who  perceived  what  I  wrote,  said,  that  the 
things  which  I  wrote  were  very  gross  ( admodum 
crassa,)  and  that  almost  all  the  expressions 
appeared  as  material ;  but  it  was  given  to  reply, 
that  to  the  men  of  our  earth  what  was  written 
seemed  subtle  and  elevated,  and  many  things 
incomprehensible :  I  added,  that  several  on  this 
earth  do  not  know,  that  it  is  the  internal  man 
which  acts  on  the  external,  and  causes  the  ex- 
ternal to  hve ;  and  that  they  persuade  them- 
selves from  the  fallacies  of  the  senses, .that  the 
body  has  life,  and  that  in  consequence  thereof, 
such  as  are  wicked  and  unbelieving  entertain 
doubts  respecting  a  life  after  death  ;  also,  that 
the  part  of  man,  which  is  to  live  after  death,  is 
not  by  them  called  spirit,  but  soul ;  and  that 
ihey  dispute  what  soul  is,  and  where  is  its  abode, 
5 


22 


and  believe,  that  the  material  body,  aUhough 
dispersed  throughout  the  atmosphere,  is  to  be 
joined  again  to  it,  in  order  that  man  may  hve  as 
man  ;  with  many  other  things  of  a  like  nature. 
The  spirits  of  Mercur}',  on  hearing  these  things, 
asked,  whether  such  men  could  become  angels  ? 
and  it  was  given  to  answer,  that  they  become 
angels,  who  have  lived  in  the  good  of  faith  and 
charity,  and  that  then  ihey  are  no  longer  in  exter- 
nal and  njaterial  things,  but  in  internal  and  spirit- 
ual ;  and  when  they  come  into  that  state,  that 
they  are  in  a  light  superior  to  that  in  which  the 
spirits  from  JNlercurj'  are.  To  convince  them 
that  it  was  so,  an  angel  was  allowed  to  discourse 
with  them,  who  had  come  into  heaven  from  our 
earth,  having  hved  in  the  good  of  faith  and 
charity,  concerning  whom  more  will  be  said 
presently. 

28.  On  another  occasion,  there  was  sent  me 
by  the  spirits  of  Mercury  a  long  piece  of  paper, 
of  an  irregular  shape,  consisting  of  several 
pieces  pasted  together,  which  appeared  as  if  cov- 
ered with  print,  like  our  printed  books;  I  asked 
wheth^  they  had  the  art  of  printing  amongst 
them?  but  the}'  said,  they  had  not,  nevertheless 
they  knew  that  on  our  earth  we  had  such  printed 
papers ;  they  had  no  inclination  to  say  more  ; 
but  I  perceived  that  they  thought  that  know- 
ledges with  us  were  upon  our  paper,  and  not  so 
much  in  our  understandings,  thus  in  a  sneering 


23 


way  insinuating,  that  our  papers  knew  more 
than  we  ourselves  did :  they  were  instructed 
however  how  the  real  case  was  in  this  respect. 
After  some  time  they  returned,  and  sent  me 
another  paper,  which  appeared  also  printed  like 
the  former,  but  not  so  pasted  together  and  ir- 
regular, but  neat  and  handsome ;  they  said,  that 
they  were  further  informed,  that  in  our  earth 
there  are  such  papers,  and  books  made  of  them. 

29.  From  the  above  account  it  appears  man- 
ifest, that  spirits  retain  in  the  memory  what 
they  see  and  hear  in  another  life,  and  that  they 
are  capable  of  being  instructed  alike  as  when 
they  were  men  in  the  world,  consequently  of 
being  instructed  in  things  appertaining  to  faith, 
and  thereby  of  being  perfected :  in  proportion 
as  spirits  and  angels  are  of  a  more  interior  cha- 
racter and  quality,  in  the  same  proportion  they 
receive  instruction  more  readily,  and  in  a  greater 
fulness,  and  retain  it  more  perfectly;  and  inas- 
much as  this  faculty  abides  forever,  it  is  evident 
that  they  are  continually  advancing  in  wisdom  : 
with  the  spirits  of  Mercury  there  is  a  constant 
growth  in  the  science  of  things,  but  not  in  wis- 
dom thence  derived,  because  they  love  know- 
ledges, which  are  means,  but  not  uses  which  are 
ends. 

30.  The  particular  genius  and  character  of 
the  spirits,  who  are  from  the  planet  Mercury, 
may  still  further  appear  from  the  following  ac- 


24 


count.    It  is  to  be  observed,  that  all  spirits  and 

angels  whatsoever  were  once  men ;  for  the 
human  race  is  the  seminary  of  heaven ;  also 
that  spirits  are  altogether  such,  as  to  affections 
and  inclinations,  as  they  were  during  their  life 
in  the  world  whilst  men ;  for  every  one's  life 
follows  him  into  another  world  :  (n)  this  being 
the  case,  the  genius  and  character  of  the  men 
of  every  earth  may  be  known  from  the  genius 
and  character  of  the  spirits  who  come  from 
thence. 

31.  Inasmuch  as  the  spirits  of  Mercury,  in 
the  Grand  JMan,  have  relation  to  the  memory 
of  things  abstracted  from  what  is  material,  there- 
fore when  any  one  discourses  with  them  con- 
cerning things  terrestrial,  corporeal,  and  merely 
Worldly,  they  are  altogether  unwilling  to  hear 
him;  and  if  they  are  forced  to  hear,  they  trans- 
mute the  things  spoken  of  into  other  things, 
and  for  the  most  part  into  things  contrary,  that 
they  may  avoid  attending  to  them. 

32.  That  I  might  be  fully  convinced  of  this  their 
particular  genius  and  character,  it  was  allow- 
ed to  represent  to  them  meadows,  fallow  lands, 

(n)  That  every  one's  life  remains  with  him  and 
follows  him  after'death,  n.  4227, 7440.  That  the 
externals  of  life  are  kept  closed  after  death,  and 
the  internals  opened,  n.  4314,5128,0495.  That 
then  all  and  singular  the  things  of  thought  are 
made  manifest,  n.  4633,  5128. 


25 


gardens,  woods,  and  rivers,  (to  represent  such 
tilings  is  imaginatively  to  exhibit  them  before 
another,  in  which  case,  in  another  world,  they 
ajjpear  to  the  life ;)  but  they  instantly  transmuted 
them,  obscuring  the  meadows  and  fallow  fields, 
and  by  representations  filling  them  with  snakes; 
the  rivers  they  made  black,  so  that  the  water 
no  longer  appeared  limpid.  When  I  asked  them 
why  they  did  so,  they  said,  that  they  had  no 
inchnation  to  think  of  such  things,  but  of  things 
real,  which  are  the  knowledges  of  things  ab- 
stracted from  what  is  terrestrial,  especially  of 
such  things  as  exist  in  the  heavens. 

33.  Afterwards  I  represented  to  them  birds 
of  different  sizes  both  large  and  small,  such  as 
exist  on  our  earth;  for  in  another  life  such 
things  may  be  represented  to  the  life ;  when  they 
saw  the  birds  represented,  they  were  dispos- 
ed at  first  to  change  them,  but  afterwards  they 
were  delighted  with  them  and  seemed  satisfied  ; 
the  reason  was,  because  birds  signify  the  know- 
ledges of  things,  and  the  perception  of  this  sig- 
nification flowed  in  also  at  that  instant ;  (o)  thus 
they  desisted  from  transmuting  them,  and  there- 
by from  averting  the  ideas  of  their  memory. 

(o)  That  birds  signify  things  rational,  things 
intellectual,  thoughts,  ideas,  and  knowledges,  n. 
40,  745,  776,  778,  866,  988,  993,  5149,  7441. 
And  this  with  a  variety  according  to  the  genera 
and  species  of  birds,  3219. 
0 


26 


Afterwards  it  was  allowed  to  represent  be- 
fore them  a  most  pleasant  garden  full  of  lamps 
and  lights;  instantly  they  paused,  and  their  at- 
tention was  fixed,  by  reason  that  lamps  with 
hghts  signify  truths  which  are  lucid  by  virtue 
of  good,  (p)  Hence  it  was  made  manifest  that 
their  attention  might  be  fixed  in  viewing  things 
material,  if  the  signification  of  those  things  in  a 
spiritual  sense  was  but  insinuated  at  the  same 
lime;  for  the  things  appertaining  to  such  spirit- 
ual sense  are  not  so  abstracted  from  things  ma- 
terial, being  representative  thereof. 

34.  Moreover  1  discoursed  with  them  con- 
cerning sheep  and  lambs,  but  they  were  not 
disposed  to  hear  of  such  things,  because  they 
were  perceived  by  them  as  things  terrestrial : 
the  reason  was,  because  they  did  not  under- 
stand what  innocence  is,  which  lambs  signify, 
as  was  perceivable  from  this  circumstance,  that 
w'hen  I  told  them  that  lambs,  represented  in 
heaven,  signify  innocence,  (q)  they  immedi- 
ately said,  that  they  did  not  know  what  inno- 
cence was,  but  only  knew  it  as  to  the  name; 
the  reason  was,  because  they  are  affected  only 
with  knowledges,  and  not  with  uses,  which  are 


(p)  That  lamps  with  lights  signify  truths  which 
are  lucid  by  virtue  of  good,  n.  4638,  9548,  9783. 

(q)  That  Iambs  in  heaven,  and  in  the  Word, 
signify  innocence,  n.  3994,  7840,  10132. 


27 


the  ends  of  knowledges,  consequently  tliey 
cannot  know,  froui  internal  perception,  what 
innocence  is. 

35.  Some  of  the  spirits  of  the  earth  Mercury 
on  a  time  came  to  me,  being  sent  by  others 
with  intent  to  learn  what  I  was  employed  about, 
to  whom  one  of  the  spirits  of  our  earth  said, 
that  they  might  tell  those  who  sent  them,  not  to 
speak  any  thing  but  what  was  true,  and  not, 
according  to  their  usual  practice,  suggest  things 
opposite  to  what  they  are  questioned  about ; 
for  if  any  of  the  spirits  of  our  earth  were  to  do 
so,  he  would  be  chastised  for  it ;  but  immedi- 
ately the  company,  which  was  at  a  distance, 
from  which  those  spirits  were  sent,  made  an- 
swer, that  if  they  must  be  chastised  on  that  ac- 
count, they  must  all  be  chastised,  inasmuch  as 
by  reason  of  acquired  habit  they  could  not  do 
otherwise.  They  added,  that  when  they  dis- 
course with  the  men  of  their  own  earth,  they 
also  do  so,  but  this  not  with  any  intention  of 
deceiving,  but  to  inspire  a  desire  of  knowledge ; 
for  when  they  suggest  things  opposite,  and  con- 
ceal things  in  a  certain  manner,  then  a  desire 
of  knowledge  is  excited,  and  thereby  from  an 
earnestness  to  search  out  and  discover  those 
things,  the  memory  is  perfected.  I  also  dis- 
coursed with  them  at  another  time  on  the  same 
subject,  and  because  I  knew  that  they  conversed 
with  the  men  of  their  earth,  I  asked  them  in 
7 


28 


what  manner  they  instruct  their  inhabitants  ? 
They  said,  that  they  do  not  instruct  them  as  to 
all  particulars  in  relation  to  the  subject  matter 
of  instruction,  but  slill  insinuate  some  percep- 
tion thereof,  that  thus  a  desire  of  examining 
and  acquiring  the  knowledge  of  it  may  be  ex- 
cited and  cherished  ;  which  desire  would  die 
away,  in  case  they  fully  explained  all  particu- 
lars. They  added,  that  they  suggest  objections 
of  things  opposite  also  for  this  reason,  that  the 
truth  afterwards  may  appear  more  striking; 
for  all  truth  is  made  manifest  by  relation  to  its 
opposites. 

36.  It  is  their  constant  custom  not  to  declare 
to  another  what  they  know,  but  still  they  desire 
to  learn  from  all  others  what  is  known  to  them  : 
nevertheless,  with  their  own  society  they  com- 
municate all  things,  insomuch  that  what  one 
knows  all  know,  and  what  all  know  each  one 
knows  in  that  society.  (/) 

37.  Inasmuch  as  the  spirits  of  Mercury 
abound  with  knowledges,  they  are  principled 
in  a  species  of  haughtiness ;  hence  they  imagine 
that  they  know  so  much,  that  it  is  almost  im- 
possible to  know  more :  but  it  has  been  told 
them  by  the  spirits  of  our  earth,  that  their 
knowledge  is  not  so  extensive  as  they  imagine, 
but  comparatively  scanty,  and  that  the  things 
which  they  do  not  know  are  infinite  in  respect 
to  what  they  do  know,  and  as  the  waters  of  the 


29 


largest  ocean  compared  with  the  waters  of  a 
very  small  founlain;  and  further,  that  the  first 
step  in  the  ladder  of  wisdom  is  to  know,  ac- 
knowledge, and  perceive,  that  what  is  known 
is  little,  and  scarce  any  thing,  in  comparison 
with  what  is  unknown.  To  convince  thein  that 
this  is  the  case,  it  was  given,  that  a  certain 
angelic  spirit  should  discourse  with  them,  and 
should  tell  them  in  general  what  they  knew, 
and  what  they  did  not  know,  and  that  there 
were  infinite  things  which  they  did  not  know, 
also  that  eternity  would  not  suffice  for  their  ac- 
quiring even  a  general  knowledge  of  things : 
he  discoursed  by  angelic  ideas,  much  more 
readily  than  they  did,  and  hecause  he  disco- 
vei-ed  to  them  what  they  knew,  and  what  they 
did  not  know,  they  were  struck  with  amaze- 
ment. Afterwards  1  saw  another  angel  dis- 
coursing with  them,  he  appeared  in  some  alti- 
tude to  the  right;  he  was  from  our  earth,  and 
enumerated  very  many  things  which  they  did 
not  know  ;  afterwards  he  discoursed  with  them 
by  changes  of  state,  which  they  said  they  did 
not  understand  ;  then  he  told  them,  that  every 
change  of  state  contains  infinite  things,  as  did 
also  every  smallest  part  of  such  change.  When 
they  heard  these  things,  inasmuch  as  they  had 
been  puffed  up  with  self-conceit  by  reason  of 
their  knowledges,  they  began  to  humble  them- 
selves :  their  humiliation  was  represented  by 


30 


the  sinking  downwards  of  their  volume  [tolu- 
■minis);  (for  that  company  then  appeared  as  a 
volume,  in  front  at  a  distance  towards  the  left, 
in  the  plane  of  the  region  below  the  navel,) 
but  the  volume  appeared  as  it  were  hollowed 
in  the  middle,  and  elevated  on  the  sides;  a  re- 
ciprocal moving  was  also  observed  therein  : 
they  were  likewise  given  to  understand  what 
that  signified,  viz.  what  they  thought  in  their 
humiliation,  and  that  they,  who  appeared  ele- 
vated on  the  sides,  were  not  as  yet  in  any  hu- 
miliation :  then  I  saw  that  the  volume  was 
separated,  and  that  they,  who  were  not  in  hu- 
miliation, were  remanded  back  towards  their 
orb,  the  rest  remaining  where  they  were. 

38.  On  a  time  the  spirits  of  Mercury  came 
to  a  certain  spirit  from  our  earth,  who,  during 
his  abode  in  the  world,  had  been  most  distin- 
guished for  his  great  learning,  (it  was  Christian 
Wolf,)  desiring  to  receive  information  from 
him  on  various  subjects;  but  when  they  per- 
ceived that  what  he  said  was  not  elevated 
above  the  sensual  things  of  the  natural  man, 
inasmuch  as  in  his  discourse  his  thoughts  were 
intent  on  fame  and  honourary  distinction,  and 
he  was  desirous  as  in  the  world  (for  in  another 
hfe  every  one  is  like  his  former  self)  to  con- 
nect various  things  into  serieses,  and  from 
those  serieses  again  and  continually  to  form 
other  conclusions,  and  thus  to  construct  a 


31 


chain  of  several  consequences  and  deductions 
grounded  therein,  which  they  did  not  see  or 
acknowledge  to  be  true,  and  which  therefore 
they  declared  to  be  chains  which  neither  co- 
hered in  themselves,  nor  with  the  conclusions, 
calling  them  obscurity  grounded  in  authority 
(obscurum  auctoritatis)  ;  they  then  desisted 
from  asking  him  further  questions,  inquiring 
only,  how  this  is  called,  and  how  that ;  and 
whereas  he  answered  these  inquiries  also  by 
material  ideas,  and  by  no  spiritual  ones,  they 
retired  from  him :  for  every  one,  in  another 
life,  discourses  spiritually,  or  by  spiritual  ideas, 
only  so  far  as  he  had  believed  on  God  during 
his  abode  in  the  world,  and  materially,  so  far 
as  he  had  not  believed  on  God.  An  occasion 
here  offering  itself,  it  may  be  expedient  to 
mention  how  it  fares  in  another  life  with  the 
learned,  who  imbibe  intelligence  from  their 
own  meditation  kindled  with  the  love  of  know- 
ing truths  for  the  sake  of  truths,  thus  for  the 
sake  of  uses  abstracted  from  wordly  consider- 
ations, and  how  with  those  who  imbibe  intelli- 
gence from  others  without  any  meditation  of 
their  own,  as  is  tlie  common  case  with  such  as 
desire  to  know  truths  solely  for  reputation's 
sake,  that  they  may  be  accounted  learned,  and 
thereby  attain  worldly  honour  or  gain,  thus  who 
desire  to  know  truths,  not  for  the  sake  of  uses 
abstracted  from  worldly  considerations.  Con- 


32 


cerning  such,  it  is  allowed  to  relate  the  follow- 
ing experience.  There  was  perceived  on  a  time 
somewhat  noisy,  or  sonorous,  [so riorum  quod- 
dam)  penetrating  from  beneath,  near  the  left 
side,  even  to  the  left  ear :  1  observed  that  they 
were  spirits,  who  there  attempted  to  force  a  way, 
but  of  what  sort  they  were  I  could  not  know  ; 
however,  when  they  had  forced  a  way,  they 
spake  with  me,  saying  that  they  were  logicians 
and  metaphysicians,  and  that  they  had  immersed 
their  thoughts  in  the  sciences  of  logic  and  me- 
taphysics, with  no  other  end  than  to  acquire  the 
character  of  being  learned,  and  thus  to  be  ad- 
vanced to  honour  and  emolument,  lamenting 
that  they  now  led  a  miserable  life,  in  conse- 
quence of  applying  to  those  sciences  with  no 
other  end,  and  thus  not  having  cultivated  thereby 
their  radonal  principle ;  their  speech  was  slow, 
and  of  a  mule  tone  (^mute  sonans).  In  the  mean 
time  there  were  two  discoursing  with  each  other 
above  my  head,  and  on  inquiring  who  they  were, 
it  was  said  that  one  of  them  was  a  most  distin- 
guished character  in  the  learned  world,  and  it 
was  given  me  to  believe  that  it  was  Aristotle; 
who  the  other  was,  remained  untold  :  the  for- 
mer was  then  let  into  the  state,  in  which  he  was 
during  his  life  in  the  world  ;  for  every  one 
may  easily  be  let  into  the  state  of  his  life,  which 
he  had  in  the  world,  inasmuch  as  he  has  with 
him  every  state  of  his  former  life  :  but,  what 


33 


surprised  me,  he  applied  himself  to  the  right 
ear,  and  there  spake,  but  in  a  hoarse  tone  of 
voice,  yet  with  sound  sense  :  from  the  purport 
of  bis  discourse  I  perceived,  that  he  was  altogeth- 
er of  a  different  genius  and  temper  from  those 
schoolmen  who  first  ascended,  in  that  he  wrote 
from  a  ground  of  thought  and  discernment  in 
himself,  and  thence  produced  his  philosophical 
discoveries  ;  so  that  the  terms,  which  he  in- 
vented, and  which  he  imposed  on  speculative 
subjects,  were  forms  of  expression  by  which  he 
described  interior  things  ;  also  that  he  was 
excited  to  such  pursuits  by  a  delight  of  the 
affection,  and  by  a  desire  of  knowing  the  things 
appertaining  to  the  thinking  and  intellectual 
faculties ;  and  that  he  followed  obediently 
whatever  his  spirit  had  dictated;  wherefore  he 
applied  himself  to  the  right  ear,  contrary  to  the 
custom  of  his  followers  who  are  called  the 
schoolmen,  and  who  do  not  go  from  thought 
to  terms,  but  from  terms  to  thoughts,  thus  in 
a  contrary  way  ;  and  several  of  them  do  not 
even  proceed  to  thoughts,  but  stick  solely  in 
terms,  which  if  they  apply,  it  is  to  confirm 
whatever  they  desire,  and  to  impose  on  false 
principles  an  appearance  of  truth  according  to 
their  eagerness  to  persuade  others  :  hence 
philosophical  investigations  led  them  rather  to 
folly  than  to  wisdom  ;  and  hence  they  have  dark- 
ness instead  of  light.    Afterwards  I  discours- 


34 


ed  with  him  concerning  the  analytic  science, 
observing,  that  a  child,  in  half  an  hour's  con- 
versation, speaks  more  philosophically,  an- 
alytically, and  logically,  than  would  be  in  his 
power  to  describe  by  a  volume,  inasmuch  as 
all  things  appertaining  to  thought,  and  to 
human  speech  thence  derived,  are  analytical, 
the  laws  whereof  are  from  the  spiritual  world  ; 
and  he  who  desires  to  think  artificially  from 
terms,  is  not  unlike  a  dancer,  who  would 
learn  to  dance  by  the  science  of  the  moving 
fibres  and  muscles,  in  which  science  if  he 
should  fix  his  mind  whilst  he  is  dancing,  it 
W'Ould  be  almost  impossible  for  him  to  move  a 
foot  ;  and  yet,  without  that  science,  he  moves 
all  the  moving  fibres  throughout  the  whole 
body,  and  in  subordination  thereto  he  moves 
the  lungs,  the  diaphragm,  the  sides,  the  arms, 
the  neck,  and  other  organs  of  the  body,  to  de- 
scribe all  which  would  require  many  volumes; 
and  the  case  is  exactly  similar  with  those,  who 
are  desirous  to  think  from  terms:  he  approved 
of  these  observations,  and  said,  that  to  learn  to 
think  in  that  way  is  proceeding  in  an  inverted 
order;  adding,  if  any  one  will  be  so  silly,  let 
him  so  proceed  ;  but  let  the  thoughts  be  ground- 
ed in  use,  and  flow  from  an  interior  principle. 
He  next  shewed  me,  what  idea  he  had  conceiv- 
ed of  the  Supreme  Deity,  viz.  that  he  had  re- 
presented him  to  his  mind  as  having  an  human 


35 


face,  and  encompassed  about  the  head  with  a 
radiant  circle;  and  that  now  he  knew  that  the 
Lord  is  himself  that  man,  and  that  the  radiant 
circle  is  the  divine  principle  proceeding  from 
him,  which  not  only  flows  into  heaven,  but  also 
into  the  universe,  disposing  and  ruling  all  things 
therein.  He  added,  whosoever  disposes  and 
rules  heaven,  he  also  disposes  and  rules  the 
universe,  because  the  one  cannot  be  separated 
from  the  other  :  he  also  said,  that  he  believed 
only  in  one  God,  whose  attributes  and  qualities 
were  distinguished  by  a  variety  of  names,  and 
that  these  names  were  by  others  worshipped  as 
so  many  gods.  There  appeared  to  me  a  wo- 
man, who  stretched  out  her  hand,  desiring  to 
stroke  my  cheek,  at  which  when  I  expressed 
my  surprise,  he  said,  that  whilst  he  was  in  the 
world,  such  a  woman  had  often  appeared  to 
him,  as  it  were  stroking  his  cheek,  and  that 
her  iiand  was  beautiful.  The  angelic  spirits 
said,  that  such  women  sometimes  appeared  to 
the  ancients,  and  were  by  them  called  Pallases, 
and  that  she  appeared  to  him  from  the  spirits, 
who,  during  their  abode  on  earth  in  ancient 
times,  were  delighted  with  ideas,  and  indulged 
in  their  thoughts,  but  without  philosophy  ;  and 
whereas  such  spirits  were  attendant  upon  him, 
and  were  delighted  with  him  because  he  thought 
from  an  interior  principle,  therefore  they  repre- 
sentatively exhibited  such  a  woman  to  his  view. 


36 


Lastly  he  informed  me  what  idea  he  had  con- 
ceived of  the  soul  or  spirit  of  man,  which  he 
called  Pneuma,  VIZ.  that  it  was  an  invisible  vital 
principle,  like  somewhat  of  aether ;  and  he 
said,  that  he  knew  that  his  spirit  would  live 
after  death,  inasmuch  as  it  was  his  interior 
essence,  which  cannot  die,  because  it  is  capa- 
ble of  thinking;  and  that  moreover  he  was  not 
able  to  think  clearly  concerning  it,  but  only 
obscurely,  because  he  had  not  formed  any 
thought  about  it  from  any  other  source  but  that 
of  his  own  mind,  and  a  little  also  from  the  an- 
cients. It  is  to  be  noted  that  Aristotle  is 
amongst  sound  and  sober  spirits  in  another  hfe, 
and  that  several  of  his  followers  are  amongst 
the  infatuated. 

39.  On  a  time  I  saw  that  spirits  of  our  earth 
were  with  spirits  of  the  earth  Mercury,  and  I 
heard  them  discoursing  together,  and  the  spir- 
its of  our  earth,  amongst  other  things,  asked 
them,  on  whom  they  believed  ?  they  replied, 
that  they  believed  on  God ;  but  when  they  in- 
quired further  concerning  the  God  on  whom 
they  believed,  they  would  give  no  answer,  it 
being  customary  with  them  not  to  answer  ques- 
tions directly.  Then  the  spirits  from  the  earth 
Mercury,  in  their  turn,  asked  the  spirits  from 
our  earth,  on  whom  they  believed?  they  said, 
that  they  believed  on  the  Lord  God :  the  spir- 
its of  Mercury  then  said,  that  they  perceived 


37 


that  they  believed  on  no  God,  and  that  they  had 
contracted  a  habit  of  professing  with  the  mouth 
that  they  believe,  when  yet  they  do  not  believe. 
(The  spirits  of  Mercury  have  exquisite  percep- 
tion, in  consequence  of  their  continually  explor- 
ing by  means  of  perception  what  others  know.) 
The  spirits  of  our  earth  were  of  the  number  of 
those,  who  in  the  world  had  made  profession 
of  faith  agreeable  to  the  doctrine  of  the  church, 
but  still  had  not  lived  the  life  of  faith,  and  they 
who  do  not  live  the  life  of  faith,  in  another  life 
have  not  faith,  because  it  is  not  in  the  man  :  (r) 
on  hearing  this  they  were  silent,  inasmuch  as, 
by  a  perception  then  given  them,  they  acknow- 
ledged that  it  was  so. 

40.  There  were  certain  spirits  who  knew 
from  heaven,  that  on  a  time  a  promise  was 
made  to  the  spirits  of  the  earth  Mercury,  that 
they  should  see  the  Lord ;  wherefore  they  were 
asked  by  the  spirits  about  me  whether  they  re- 
collected that  promise?  They  said  that  they 
did  recollect  it;  but  that  they  did  not  know 
whether  the  promise  was  of  such  a  nature,  as 
that  they  might  depend  with  certainty  on  its 

(r )  That  they  who  make  profession  of  faith 
agreeable  to  doctrine,  and  do  not  live  the  life  of 
faith,  have  no  faith,  n.  3865,  7766,  7778,  7790, 
7950,  8094.  And  that  their  interiors  are  contrary 
to  the  truths  of  faith,  although  in  the  vTorld  they 
do  not  know  this,  n.  7790,  7950. 
8 


38 


accomplishment.  Whilst  they  were  thus  dis- 
coursing together,  instantly  the  sun  of  heaven 
appeared  to  them:  (the  sun  of  heaven,  which 
is  the  Lord,  is  seen  only  by  those  who  are  in 
the  inmost  or  third  heaven ;  others  see  the  light 
thence  derived:)  on  seeing  the  sun,  they  said, 
that  this  was  not  the  Lord  God,  because  they 
did  not  see  a  face.  In  the  meanwhile  the 
spirits  discoursed  with  each  other,  but  I  did 
not  hear  what  they  said.  But  on  a  sudden,  at 
that  instant,  the  sun  again  appeared,  and  in 
the  midst  thereof  the  Lord,  encompassed  with 
a  solar  circle ;  on  seeing  this,  the  spirits  of 
Mercury  humbled  themselves  profoundly,  and 
subsided.  Then  also  the  Lord,  from  that  sun, 
appeared  to  the  spirits  of  this  earth,  who,  when 
they  were  men,  saw  him  in  the  world,  and  they 
all,  one  after  another,  and  thus  several  in  order, 
confessed,  that  it  was  the  Lord  himself;  this 
confession  they  made  before  all  the  company. 
At  the  same  instant  also  the  Lord,  out  of  the 
sun,  appeared  to  the  spirits  of  the  planet  Jupi- 
ter, who  declared  with  open  voice,  that  it  was 
he  himself,  whom  they  had  seen  on  their  earth, 
when  the  God  of  the  universe  appeared  to 
them,  (s) 


(s)  That  the  Lord  is  the  sun  of  heaven,  from 
whom  all  light  therein  is  derived,  n.  1053,  3636, 
4060.    And  that  the  Lord  thus  appears  to  those 


39 


41.  Certain  of  them,  after  that  the  Lord  ap- 
peared, were  led  off  frontwards  to  the  right, 
and  as  they  advanced,  they  said,  that  they  saw 
a  hght  much  clearer  and  purer  than  they  had 
ever  seen  before,  and  that  it  was  impossible 
any  light  could  exceed  it;  and  it  was  then  even- 
tide here  :  there  were  several  who  made  this 
declaration,  (t) 

who  are  in  his  celestial  kingdom,  where  love  to 
him  is  prevalent,  n.  1521, 1529, 1530, 1531, 1837, 
4696.  That  he  appears  at  a  middle  distance 
above  the  plane  of  the  right  eye,  n.  4321,  7078. 
That  therefore  by  sun  in  the  Word  is  signified 
the  Lord  as  to  divine  love,  n.  2495,  4060,  7083. 
That  the  sun  of  this  world  does  not  appear  to 
spirits  and  angels,  but  in  the  place  thereof  there 
appears  somewhat  as  it  were  darkish,  not  in  front, 
but  behind,  in  a  direction  opposite  to  the  sun  of 
heaven,  or  to  the  Lord,  n.  9755. 

(t)  That  there  is  in  the  heavens  great  light, 
which  exceeds,  by  many  degrees,  the  mid-day 
light  of  this  world,  n.  1117,  1521,  1533,  1619, 
to  1632,  4527,  5400,  8644.  That  all  light  in  the 
heavens  is  from  the  Lord  as  a  sun  there,  n.  1053, 
1521,  3195,  3341,3636,  3643,  4415,  9548,  9684, 
10809.  That  the  divine  truth  proceedingfrom  the 
divine  good  of  the  divine  love  of  the  Lord  appears 
in  the  heavens  as  light,  and  presents  all  the  light 
that  is  therein,  n.  3195,3222,  54008,644,  9399, 
9548,9684.  That  the  light  of  heaven  illuminates 
both  the  sight  and  the  understandingof  the  angels, 


40 


42.  It  is  to  be  observed,  that  the  sun  of  this 
world  does  not  appear  at  all  to  any  spirit,  nor 
any  thing  of  light  thence  derived ;  the  light  of 
that  sun  is  as  thick  darkness  to  spirits  and  an- 
gels :  that  sun  remains  only  in  the  perception 
appertaining  to  spirits  from  having  seen  it  dur- 
ing their  abode  in  the  world,  and  is  presented 
to  them  in  idea  as  somewhat  darkish,  and  this 
behind  at  a  considerable  distance,  in  an  altitude 
a  little  above  the  plane  of  the  head.  The  pla- 
nets, which  are  whhin  the  system  of  that  sun, 
appear  according  to  a  determinate  situation  in 
respect  to  the  sun ;  Mercury  behind  a  little  to- 
wards the  right;  Venus  to  the  left  a  httle  back- 
wards ;  Mars  to  the  left  in  front ;  Jupiter  in  like 
manner  to  the  left  in  front,  but  at  a  greater  dis- 
tance ;  Saturn  directly  in  front,  at  a  considera- 
ble distance;  the  moon  to  the  left  at  a  con- 
siderable height :  the  satellites  also  to  the  left  in 
respect  to  their  particular  planet.  Such  is  the 
situation  of  the  above  planets  in  the  ideas  of 
spirits  and  angels :  spirits  also  appear  near  their 
respective  planets,  but  out  of  them.  As  to 
what  particularly  concerns  the  spirits  of  Mer- 
cury, they  do  not  appear  in  any  certain  deter- 
minate quarter,  or  at  any  certain  determinate 

n.  2776,  3138.  That  when  heaven  is  said  to  be 
in  light  and  heat,  it  signifies  being  in  wisdom  and 
in  love,  n.  3643,  9399,  9401. 


41 


distance,  but  sometimes  in  front,  sometimes  to 
the  left,  sometimes  a  little  to  the  back ;  the 
reason  is,  because  they  are  allowed  to  wander 
through  the  universe  to  procure  for  themselves 
knowledges. 

43.  On  a  time  the  spirits  of  Mercury  ap- 
peared to  the  left  in  a  globe,  and  afterwards  in 
a  volume  extending  itself  lengthways ;  I  won- 
dered whither  they  were  desirous  of  going, 
whether  to  this  earth,  or  elsewhere,  and  pre- 
sently I  observed  that  they  inclined  to  the  right, 
and  as  they  rolled  along,  approached  to  the 
eajth  or  planet  Venus  towards  the  quarter  in 
front;  but  when  they  came  thither  they  said, 
that  they  would  not  abide  there,  because  the 
inhabitants  were  wicked  ;  wherefore  they  turn- 
ed about  to  the  back  part  of  that  earth,  and 
then  said,  that  they  would  willingly  stay  there, 
because  the  inhabitants  were  good.  Immedi- 
ately on  this,  I  was  made  sensible  of  a  remark- 
able change  in  the  brain,  and  of  a  powerful 
operation  thence  proceeding.  Hence  it  was 
given  to  conclude,  that  the  spirits  of  Venus, 
who  are  on  tiiat  part  of  the  planet,  were  in  con- 
cord with  the  spirits  of  Mercury,  and  that  they 
had  relation  to  the  memory  of  things  material 
which  was  in  concord  with  the  memory  of 
things  immaterial,  to  which  latter  memory  the 
spirits  of  Mercury  have  relation  :  hence  a  more 
9 


42 


powerful  operation  was  felt  from  them  when 
ti)ey  were  there. 

44.  I  was  desirous  to  know  what  kind  of 
face  and  body  the  men  in  the  earth  Mercury 
had,  whether  they  were  like  the  men  on  our 
earth;  instantly  there  was  presented  before 
my  eyes  a  woman  exactly  resembling  the  wo- 
men in  that  earth ;  she  had  a  beautiful  face, 
but  it  was  smaller  than  that  of  a  v/oman  of  our 
earth  ;  her  body  also  was  more  slender,  but  her 
height  was  equal;  she  wore  on  her  head  a  linen 
cap,  which  was  put  on  without  art,  but  yet  in 
a  manner  becoming.  A  man  also  was  pre- 
sented to  view,  who  was  more  slender  in  body 
than  the  men  of  our  earth  are;  he  was  clad  in 
a  garment  of  a  dark  blue  colour,  closely  fitted 
to  his  body,  without  any  foldings  or  protuber- 
ances: it  was  given  to  understand,  that  such 
was  the  form  of  body,  and  such  the  dress  of 
the  men  of  that  earth.  Afterwards  there  was 
presented  to  view  a  species  of  their  oxen  and 
cows,  which  indeed  did  not  differ  much  from 
those  on  our  earth,  only  that  they  were  less, 
and  in  some  degree  approached  to  a  species  of 
deer. 

45.  They  were  questioned  also  concerning 
the  sun  of  the  system,  how  it  appears  from 
their  earth?  Tliey  said  that  it  appears  large, 
and  larger  there  than  when  seen  from  other 


43 

earths,  and  that  they  knew  this  from  the  ideas 
of  other  spirits  concerning  the  sun.  They 
said  further,  that  they  enjoy  a  middle  temper- 
ature, neither  too  hot  nor  too  cold ;  it  was  on 
this  occasion  given  me  to  tell  them,  that  it  was 
so  provided  of  the  Lord  in  regard  to  them, 
that  they  should  not  be  exposed  to  too  much 
heat,  by  reason  of  their  greater  nearness  to  the 
sun,  inasmuch  as  heat  does  not  arise  from  the 
sun's  nearness,  but  from  the  altitude  and  den- 
sity of  the  atmospliere,  as  appears  from  the 
cold  on  high  mountains  even  in  hot  climates; 
also  that  heat  is  varied  according  to  the  direct 
or  oblique  incidence  of  the  suns  rays,  as  is 
plain  from  the  seasons  of  winter  and  suinmer 
in  every  region.  These  are  the  things  which 
it  was  given  to  know  concerning  the  spirits  and 
inhabitants  of  the  earth  Mercury. 


Concerning  the  Earth  or  Planet  Jupiter,  its 
Spirits  and  Inhabitants. 

46.  It  was  granted  me  to  enjoy  longer  com- 
merce with  the  spirits  and  angels  of  the  planet 
Jupiter,  than  whh  the  spirits  and  angels  from  the 
rest  of  the  planets,  wherefore  I  am  at  liberty 
to  be  more  particular  in  regard  to  the  state  of 
life  of  them,  and  of  the  inhabitants  of  that  planet. 
That  those  spirits  were  from  that  planet,  was 
10 


I 


44 


evident  from  many  circumstances,  and  was  also 
confirmed  by  a  declaration  from  heaven. 

47.  The  real  earth  or  planet  Jupiter  does  not 
indeed  appear  to  spirits  and  angels  ;  for  to  the 
inhabitants  of  the  spiritual  world  no  material 
earth  is  visible,  but  only  the  spirits  and  angels 
who  come  thence.  They  who  are  from  the 
planet  Jupiter  appear  in  front  to  the  left  at  a 
considerable  distance,  and  this  constantly,  see 
above,  n.  42  ;  there  also  is  the  planet ;  the  spirits 
of  every  earth  are  near  their  respective  earth, 
in  consequence  of  having  been  inhabitants 
thereof,  (for  every  man  after  death  becomes  a 
spirit)  and  in  consequence  of  being  thus  of  a 
similar  genius  and  temper  with  the  inhabitants, 
and  of  being  in  a  capacity  thereby  of  associat- 
ing with  and  serving  them. 

48.  The  spirits  from  the  earth  Jupiter  relat- 
ed, that  the  multitude  of  men  therein  was  as 
great  as  the  earth  could  support;  and  that  the 
earth  was  fruitful  and  plentiful  in  all  produc- 
tions; and  that  the  inhabitants  had  no  desires 
beyond  the  necessaries  of  life;  and  that  they 
accounted  nothing  useful  but  so  far  as  it  was 
necessary ;  and  that  hence  the  number  of  in- 
habitants was  so  great.  They  said,  that  the 
education  of  their  children  was  their  greatest 
concern,  and  that  they  loved  them  most  ten- 
derly. 

49.  They  further  related,  that  the  inhabit- 


45 


ants  are  distinguished  into  nations,  fannilies,  and 
houses,  and  that  they  all  live  apart  with  tlieir 
own  kindred,  and  that  hence  their  connexions 
are  confined  to  relatives;  hkewise  that  no  one 
covets  another's  property,  and  that  it  never 
enters  into  their  minds  to  desire  the  posses- 
sions of  another,  still  less  to  obtain  them  fraud- 
ulently, and  least  of  all  to  extort  them  by 
violence;  such  violence  they  consider  as  a 
criminal  act  contrary  to  human  nature,  and 
regard  it  as  horrible.  When  I  would  have  told 
them,  that  on  this  earth  there  are  wars,  depre- 
dations, and  murders,  they  instantly  turned 
away  from  me,  and  expressed  an  aversion  to 
hear.  It  was  declared  to  me  by  the  angels, 
that  the  most  ancient  people  on  this  earth  liv- 
ed in  like  manner  as  the  inhabitants  of  the 
planet  Jupiter,  viz.  that  tliey  were  distinguish- 
ed into  nations,  families,  and  houses,  and  that 
all  at  that  time  were  content  with  their  own 
possessions;  and  that  it  was  a  thing  altogether 
unknown  for  one  person  to  enrich  himself  at 
the  expense  of  another,  or  to  aspire  at  domin- 
ion from  a  principle  of  self-love ;  and  that  on 
this  account  the  ancient  times,  and  especially 
the  most  ancient,  were  more  acceptable  to  the 
Lord  than  succeeding  times.  And  such  be- 
ing the  state  of  the  world,  innocence  also  then 
reigned,  attended  with  wisdom  ;  every  one  did 
what  was  good  from  a  principle  of  good,  and 


4G 


what  was  just  from  a  principle  of  justice ;  to  do 
what  is  good  and  just  with  a  view  to  self-ad- 
vancement, or  for  the  sake  of  gain,  was  a  thing 
unknown ;  at  the  same  time  they  spake  nothing 
but  what  was  true,  and  this  not  so  much  from 
a  principle  of  truth,  as  from  a  principle  of 
good,  that  is,  not  from  an  intellectual  principle 
separate  from  the  will-principle,  but  from  a 
will-principle  joined  with  the  intellectual. 
Such  were  the  ancient  times,  wherefore  angels 
could  then  converse  with  men,  and  convey 
their  minds,  almost  separate  from  things  cor- 
poreal, into  heaven,  yea,  could  conduct  them 
through  the  heavenly  societies,  and  shew  them 
the  magnificent  and  blessed  things  abounding 
therein,  and  hkewise  communicate  to  them 
their  happiness  and  delights:  these  times  were 
known  also  to  the  ancient  writers,  and  were  by' 
them  called  the  golden  and  also  saturnian 
ages.  The  superior  excellence  of  those  times, 
as  was  observed,  was  owing  to  this,  that  men 
were  then  distinguished  into  nations,  nations 
into  families,  and  families  into  houses,  and 
every  house  lived  apart  by  itself;  and  it  then 
never  entered  into  any  one's  mind  to  invade 
another's  inheritance,  and  thence  acquire  to 
himself  opulence  and  dominion  ;  self-love  and 
the  love  of  the  world  were  then  far  from  men's 
affections;  every  one  rejoiced  in  his  own,  and 
not  less  in  his  neighbour's  good.    But  in  sue- 


47 


ceeding  times  this  scene  was  changed,  and  to- 
tally reversed,  when  the  kist  of  dominion  and 
of  large  possessions  invaded  the  mind;  then 
mankind,  for  the  sake  of  self-defence,  collect- 
ed themselves  into  kingdoms  and  empires  ;  and 
inasmuch  as  the  laws  of  charity  and  of  con- 
science, which  were  inscribed  on  the  hearts, 
ceased  to  operate,  it  became  necessary  to  en- 
act external  laws  in  order  to  restrain  violence, 
and  to  secure  obedience  thereto  by  temporal 
rewards  and  punishments.  When  the  state  of 
the  world  was  thus  changed,  heaven  removed 
itself  from  man,  and  this  more  and  more  even 
to  the  present  time,  when  the  very  existence  of 
heaven  and  hell  is  unknown,  and  by  some  de- 
nied. This  account  of  the  primitive  state  of 
the  inhabitants  of  this  earth  is  given,  in  order 
to  shew  more  clearly  by  the  parallel,  what  is 
the  state  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  Jupiter, 
and  whence  they  have  their  probity  and  also 
their  wisdom,  concerning  which  more  will  be 
said  hereafter. 

50.  By  long  and  frequent  conversation  with 
the  spirits  of  the  earth  Jupiter,  it  was  made 
very  manifest  to  me,  that  they  were  better  dis- 
posed than  the  spirits  of  several  other  earths; 
the  manner  of  their  approach  to  me,  their  abode 
with  nie,  and  their  influx  at  the  time,  was  inex- 
pressibly gentle  and  sweet;  in  another  life  the 
quality  of  every  spirit  manifests  itself  by  an  in- 


48 


flux,  which  is  the  communication  of  its  affection; 
goodness  of  disposition  manifests  itself  by  gen- 
tleness and  sweetness,  by  gentleness,  in  that  it 
is  afraid  to  do  hurt,  and  by  sweetness,  in  that 
it  loves  to  do  good :  I  could  clearly  distinguish 
a  difference  between  the  gentleness  and  sweet- 
ness of  the  influx  proceeding  from  the  spirits  of 
Jupiter,  and  of  that  which  proceeds  from  the 
good  spirits  of  our  earth.  When  any  slight  dis- 
agreement exists  amongst  them,  they  said  that 
there  appears  a  sort  of  slender  bright  irradia- 
tion, like  that  of  lightning,  or  like  the  little  swath 
encompassing  glittering  and  wandering  stars ; 
but  all  dissagreements  amongst  them  are  soon 
adjusted.  Glittering  stars,  which  are  at  the 
same  time  wandering,  signify  what  is  false,  but 
glittering  and  fixed  stars  signify  what  is  true ; 
thus  the  former  signify  disagreement,  (m) 

51.  I  could  distinguish  the  presence  of  the 
spirits  of  Jupiter,  not  only  by  the  gentleness 
and  sweetness  of  their  approach  and  influx,  but 
also  by  this  circumstance,  that  for  the  most 
part  their  influx  was  into  the  face,  to  which 
they  communicated  a  smiling  cheerfulness,  and 
this  continually  during  their  presence.  They 

(u)  That  stars  in  the  VVord  signify  the  know- 
ledges of  good  and  truth,  consequently  truths,  n. 
2495, 2849, 4697.  And  that  in  another  life  truths 
are  represented  by  fixed  stars,  but  falses  by  wan- 
dering stars,  n.  1128. 


49 


said,  that  they  communicate  a  like  cheerful- 
ness of  countenance  to  the  inhabitants  of  their 
earth,  when  they  come  to  them,  being  desirous 
thus  to  inspire  them  with  heartfelt  tranquillity 
and  delight:  that  tranquillity  and  delight,  with 
which  they  inspired  me,  filled  my  breast  and 
heart  very  sensibly  ;  at  the  same  time  there  was 
a  removal  of  all  evil  lusts  and  anxiety  concern- 
ing things  to  come,  which  cause  unquiet  and 
disturbance,  and  excite  various  commotions  in 
the  mind.  Hence  was  discoverable  the  nature 
and  quality  of  the  life  of  the  inhabitants  of  the 
earth  Jupiter;  for  the  disposition  of  the  inha- 
bitants of  any  earth  may  be  known  by  the  spirits 
who  come  thence,  inasmuch  as  every  one  re- 
tains his  own  proper  life  after  death,  and 
continues  to  live  it  when  he  becomes  a  spirit. 
It  was  very  observable,  that  they  had  a  state 
of  blessedness  or  happiness  still  more  interior, 
which  was  manifest  from  this  circumstance, 
that  their  interiors  were  perceived  not  to  be 
closed,  but  open  to  heaven ;  for  in  proportion 
as  the  interiors  are  more  open  to  heaven,  in  the 
same  proportion  they  are  more  susceptible  of 
receiving  divine  good,  and  therewith  blessed- 
ness and  interior  happiness.  The  case  is  al- 
together otherwise  with  those  who  do  not  live 
in  the  order  of  heaven ;  the  interiors  with  such 
are  closed,  and  the  exteriors  open  to  the  world. 
52.  It  was  farther  shewn  me  what  sort  of 


50 


faces  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  Jupiter  had  ; 
not  that  the  inhabitants  themselves  appeared 
to  me,  but  that  the  spirits  appeared  with  faces 
similar  to  what  they  had  during  iheir  abode  on 
their  earth.  But  previous  to  this  manifesta- 
tion, one  of  their  angels  appeared  behind  a 
bright  cloud,  who  gave  permission ;  and  in- 
stantly two  faces  were  presented  to  view ;  they 
were  like  the  faces  of  the  men  of  our  earth, 
fair  and  beautiful ;  sincerity  and  modesty  seem- 
ed to  beam  forth  from  them.  During  the  pre- 
sence of  the  spirits  of  Jupiter,  the  faces  of  the 
men  of  our  earth  appeared  less  than  usual, 
which  circumstance  was  owing  to  this,  that 
there  was  an  influx  from  those  spirits  of  the 
idea  which  they  had  concerning  their  own 
faces,  as  being  larger;  for  they  believe,  during 
their  abode  in  their  earth,  that  after  their  de- 
cease their  faces  will  be  larger,  and  of  a  round 
shape  ;  and  whereas  this  idea  is  impressed  on 
them,  it  consequently  remains  with  them,  and 
when  they  become  spirits,  they  appear  to 
themselves  as  having  larger  faces.  The  reason 
why  they  believe  that  their  faces  will  be  larger, 
is,  because  they  say  that  the  face  is  not  body, 
inasmuch  as  through  it  they  see,  hear,  speak, 
and  manifest  their  thoughts;  and  whereas  the 
mind  is  thus  transparent  through  the  face,  they 
hence  form  an  idea  of  the  face  as  of  mind  in 
a  form;  and  inasmuch  as  they  know  that  they 


61 


shall  become  wiser  when  they  cease  to  live  in 
the  body,  therefore  they  believe  that  the  form 
of  the  mind,  or  the  face,  will  become  larger. 
They  believe  also,  that  after  their  decease  they 
shall  perceive  a  fire,  which  will  communicate 
warmth  to  their  faces;  this  belief  takes  its  rise 
from  hence,  that  the  wiser  amongst  them  know 
that  fire  in  a  spiritual  sense  signifies  love,  and 
that  love  is  the  fire  of  life,  and  ihat  the  angels 
have  life  from  this  fire,  (x)  Such  of  them  also 
as  have  lived  in  celestial  love,  have  their  wishes 
herein  gratified,  and  perceive  a  warmth  in  the 
face,  and  at  the  same  time  the  interiors  of  the 
mind  are  kindled  with  love.  It  is  on  this  ac- 
count that  the  inhabitants  of  that  earth  fre- 
quently wash  and  make  clean  their  faces,  and 
also  carefully  secure  them  from  the  sun's  heat. 
They  use  a  covering  for  the  head,  made  of 
the  bark  of  a  tree  of  a  bluish  colour,  which 
serves  as  a  shade  for  the  face.  Concerning 

(x)  That  fire  in  the  word  signifies  love  in  both 
senses,  n.  934, 4906,  5215.  That  sacred  and  ce- 
lestial fire  is  divine  love,  and  every  atFectioa 
which  is  of  that  love,  n.  934,  6314,  6832.  That 
infernal  fire  is  self-love  and  the  love  of  the  world, 
and  every  concupiscence  appertaining  to  those 
loves,  n.  965,  1861,  5071,  6314,  6832,  7575, 
10747.  That  love  is  the  fire  of  Ufe,  and  that  life 
itself  is  actually  derived  -from  that  fire,  n.  4906, 
5071,  6032. 


52 


the  faces  of  the  men  of  our  earth,  which  they 

saw  through  my  eyes,  (y)  they  said  that  they 
were  noi  handsome,  and  that  the  beauty  wliich 
they  had,  consisted  in  the  external  skin,  but 
not  in  the  fibres  derived  from  what  is  internal; 
they  were  surprised  to  see  the  faces  of  some 
full  of  pimples  and  carbuncles,  and  in  other 
respects  deformed,  and  said,  that  they  have  no 
such  faces  amongst  them.  Some  of  their  faces 
retained  a  smiling  cast,  [even  in  the  spiritual 
world]  viz.  such  as  were  of  a  cheerful  and 
smiling  habit,  and  such  as  were  a  httle  pro- 
minent about  the  lips. 

53.  The  reason  why  the  faces,  which  were 
prominent  about  the  lips,  retained  a  smiling 
cast,  was,  because  the  chief  part  of  their  dis- 
course is  effected  by  the  face,  and  especially 
by  the  region  about  the  lips,  and  also  because 
they  never  use  deceit,  that  is,  never  speak 
otherwise  than  they  think,  the  consequence  of 
which  is,  that  they  use  no  restraint  in  regard  to 
the  face,  but  let  all  the  features  and  fibres  have 
free  play  :  the  case  is  otherwise  with  those, 
who  from  their  childhood  have  been  practised 
in  deceit;  the  face  is  thereby  contracted  from 
within,  to  prevent  the  inward  thoughts  from 


(y)  That  spirits  and  angels  do  not  see  the 
things  of  this  solar  vvorld,  but  that  they  saw 
through  my  eyes,  n.  1881. 


53 


being  manifested  ;  neither  has  it  free  play 
from  without,  but  is  kept  in  readiness  either  to 
put  itself  forth,  or  to  contract  itself,  according 
to  the  suggestions  of  craft  or  cunning.  The 
truth  of  this  may  appear  from  an  examination 
of  the  fibres  of  the  lips,  and  of  the  parts  there- 
abouts, for  the  series  of  fibres  in  those  parts  are 
manifold,  complex,  and  interwoven  together, 
being  created  not  only  for  the  purposes  of  re- 
ceiving and  chewing  the  food,  and  of  forming 
expressions  of  speech,  but  also  of  manifesting 
the  ideas  of  the  mind  by  their  various  confi- 
gurations. 

54.  It  was  also  shewn  me  how  the  thoughts 
are  expressed  by  the  face  ;  the  affections,  which 
appertain  to  the  love-principle,  are  manifested 
by  the  features  and  their  changes,  and  the 
thoughts  in  tliose  affections  by  variations  as  to 
the  forms  of  interior  things  therein  ;  it  is  im- 
possible to  describe  them  further.  The  inhabi- 
tants of  the  earth  Jupiter  use  also  vocal  dis- 
course, but  it  is  not  so  loud  as  with  us;  one 
kind  of  discourse  is  an  aid  to  the  other,  and  life 
is  insinuated  into  vocal  discourse  by  that  of  the 
i  countenance.  I  am  informed  by  the  angels,  that 
the  first  discourse  of  all  in  every  earth  was  effect- 
ed by  the  face,  and  this  from  two  origins,  the  lips 
and  the  eyes.  The  reason  why  this  kind  of 
discourse  was  firr.t  in  use  is,  because  the  face 
was  formed  to  express  by  its  features  all  a  man's 
11 


54 


thoughts  and  inclinations;  hence  the  face  is 
called  an  effigy  and  index  of  ihe  mind.  A  fur- 
ther reason  is,  because  in  the  most  ancient  or 
primalive  times  man  was  influenced  by  a  prin- 
ciple of  sincerity,  and  cherished  no  thought, 
nor  wished  to  cherish  any,  but  wi)at  he  was  wil- 
ling should  beam  forth  visibly  in  his  face.  Thus 
also  the  affections  of  the  mind,  and  the  thoughts 
therein  originating,  might  be  exhibited  lo  the 
life,  and  in  their  fulness  ;  hereby  likewise  they 
were  made  visible,  as  several  things  united 
together  in  a  form.  This  kind  of  discourse 
therefore  excelled  vocal  discourse  as  much  as 
the  sense  of  seeing  excels  that  of  hearing,  or  as 
the  sight  of  a  fine  country  excels  a  verbal  de- 
scription of  it.  Add  to  this,  that  such  discourse 
was  in  agreement  with  the  discourse  of  angels, 
with  whom  men  in  those  times  had  communi- 
cation ;  and  also  that  when  the  face  speaks,  or 
the  mind  by  the  face,  the  angelic  discourse  is 
exhibited  with  man  in  its  ultimate  natural  form, 
but  not  so  in  verbal  discourse.  Every  one  also 
may  conceive,  that  the  most  ancient  people 
could  not  at  first  practise  verbal  discourse,  in- 
asmuch as  the  expressions  of  vocal  language 
are  not  infused  immediately,  but  must  have 
been  invented,  and  applied  to  the  things  they 
were  intended  to  express  ;  and  this  would  re- 


55 


quire  a  course  of  time  to  effect,  (^r)  So  long 
as  man  continuerl  to  be  influenced  by  a  prin- 
ciple of  sincerity  and  rectitude,  so  long  also 
such  discourse  remained  ;  but  as  soon  as  the 
mind  began  to  think  one  thing  and  speak 
another,  which  was  the  case  when  man  began 
to  love  himself  and  not  his.  neighbour,  then 
verbal  discourse  began  to  increase,  the  face 
being  either  silent  or  deceitful ;  hence  the  in- 
ternal form  of  the  face  was  changed,  contracted 
itself,  acquired  stiffness,  and  began  to  be  nearly 
void  of  life  ;  whilst  the  external  form,  inflamed 
by  the  fire  of  self-love,  appeared  in  the  eyes  of 
men  as  if  it  were  alive  ;  for  a  want  of  life  in 
the  internal  forms,  which  are  hid  underneath 
the  external,  does  not  appear  before  men,  but 
is  manifest  to  the  angels,  inasmuch  as  the  latter 
see  interior  things.  Such  are  the  faces  of 
those  who  think  one  thing  and  speak  another: 
for  simulation,  hypocrisy,  cunning,  and  deceit, 
which  at  this  day  are  called  prudence,  have  a 
tendency  to  produce  such  effects.     But  the 

(z)  That  the  most  ancient  people  on  this  earth 
used  to  discourse  by  the  face  and  lips,  by  means 
of  internal  aspiration,  n.  607,  1118,  7361.  That 
the  inhabitants  of  some  other  earths  used  to  dis- 
course in  like  manner,  n.  4799, 7359, 8248, 10587. 
Concerning  the  perfection  and  excellence  of  that 
discourse,  n.  7360,  10587,  10708. 


56 


case  is  otherwise  in  another  hfe,  where  it  is  not 
allowable  for  the  speech  and  thoughts  to  be  at 
variance  ;  their  variance  also  is  there  clearly 
perceived  in  every  single  expression,  and  when 
it  is  perceived,  the  spirit,  who  is  found  guilty, 
is  separated  from  his  associates,  and  fined ; 
afterwards  he  is. reduced  by  various  methods 
to  speak  as  he  thinks,  and  to  think  as  he  wills, 
until  his  mind  be  one,  and  not  divided  ;  if  he 
be  a  good  spirit,  he  is  reduced  to  a  state  of 
willing  what  is  good,  and  of  thinking  and  speak- 
ing what  is  true,  from  a  principle  of  good  ;  and 
if  he  be  an  evil  spirit,  he  is  reduced  to  a  state 
of  willing  what  is  evil,  and  of  thinking  and  speak- 
ing what  is  false,  from  a  principle  of  evil ;  until 
this  is  effected,  the  good  spirit  is  not  elevated 
into  heaven,  nor  is  the  evil  one  cast  into  hell ; 
and  this  to  the  end,  that  in  hell  there  may  be 
nothing  but  evil  and  the  false  grounded  in  evil, 
and  in  heaven  nothing  but  good  and  truth 
groimded  in  good. 

55.  I  was  further  informed  by  the  spirits 
from  that  earth,  concerning  various  particulars 
relating  to  its  inhabitants,  as  concerning  their 
manner  of  walking,  concerning  their  food,  and 
their  habitations.  With  respect  to  their  manner 
of  walking,  they  do  not  walk  erect  like  the  in- 
habhants  of  this  and  of  several  other  earths,  nor 
do  they  creep  on  all  four,  like  four-footed  beasts, 
but  as  they  go  along,  they  assist  theniselves 


57 

uilh  their  hands,  and  aUernately  half  elevate 
themselves  on  their  feet,  and  also  at  every  third 
step  turn  the  face  sideways  and  behind  them, 
and  likewise  at  the  same  time  bend  the  body 
a  little,  which  is  done  suddenly ;  for  it  is  thought 
indecent  amongst  them  to  be  seen  in  any  other 
point  of  view  than  with  the  face  in  front.  In 
walking  thus,  they  always  keep  the  face  el- 
evated as  with  us,  that  so  they  may  look  at  the 
heavens  as  well  as  the  earth  ;  holding  the  face 
downwards  so  as  to  see  the  earth  alone,  they 
call  an  accursed  thing  ;  the  most  vile  and  ab- 
ject amongst  them  give  into  this  habit,  but  if 
they  continue  in  it,  they  are  banished  the  soci- 
ety. When  they  sit,  they  appear  like  men  of 
our  earih,  erect  as  to  the  upper  part  of  the 
body,  but  they  usually  sit  cross-legged.  They 
are  particularly  cautious,  not  only  when  they 
walk,  but  also  when  they  sit,  to  be  seen  with 
the  face  in  front,  and  not  as  to  the  back  parts; 
they  are  also  very  willing  to  have  their  faces 
seen,  because  thence  their  mind  appears  ;  for 
with  them  the  face  is  never  at  variance  with 
the  mind,  nor  indeed  have  they  power  to  make 
it  so  ;  hence  it  evidently  appears,  on  an  inter- 
view with  them,  what  dispositions  they  entertain 
towards  all  who  are  present,  especially  whether 
their  apparent  friendship  be  sincere  or  forced, 
for  this  they  never  conceal.  These  particulars 
were  declared  to  me  by  their  spirits,  and  con- 
12 


58 


firmed  by  their  angels:  hence  also  their  spirits 
are  seen  to  walk,  not  erect  hke  others,  but 
almost  like  persons  swimming,  appearing  to 
help  themselves  forward  with  their  hands,  and 
by  turns  to  look  around  them. 

&6.  They  who  live  in  their  warm  chmates, 
go  naked,  except  about  the  loins  ;  nor  are  they 
ashamed  of  their  nakedness,  inasmuch  as  tiieir 
minds  are  chaste,  loving  none  but  such  as  they 
are  in  conjugal  connexion  with,  and  abhorring 
adultery.  They  were  very  much  surprised  at 
the  spirits  of  our  earth,  who,  on  hearing  of 
their  method  of  walking,  and  also  that  they 
were  naked,  made  a  joke  of  it,  and  gave  way 
to  lascivious  thoughls,  without  attending  at  all 
to  their  heavenly  life.  They  said,  tiiat  this  was 
a  proof  that  things  corporeal  and  terrestrial 
were  of  more  concern  to  them  than  celestial 
things,  and  that  things  of  an  indecent  nature 
had  place  in  their  minds.  Those  spirits  of  our 
earth  were  told,  that  nakedness  gives  no  oc- 
casion either  of  shame  or  of  scandal  to  such 
as  live  in  chastity  and  a  stale  of  innocence,  but 
only  to  such  as  live  in  lasciviousness  and  im- 
modesty. 

57.  When  the  inhabitants  of  that  earth  lie 
in  bed,  they  turn  their  faces  forward,  or  to- 
wards the  chamber,  but  not  backward,  or  to- 
wards the  wall :  this  was  told  me  by  their  spirits, 
who  assigned  also  the  reason  for  tiieir  §o  do- 


59 


ing,  viz.  that  they  believe,  that  in  turning  the 
face  forward,  they  turn  it  to  the  Lord,  but  if 
they  turn  it  backward,  they  avert  it  from  the 
Lord.  I  have  sometimes  observed,  in  regard 
to  myself,  whilst  I  was  in  bed,  such  a  direction 
of  the  face,  but  I  never  knew  before  whence  it 
was. 

58.  They  take  delight  in  making  long  meals, 
not  so  much  for  the  pleasure  of  eating,  as  for 
the  pleasure  of  discoursing  at  such  times. 
Whilst  they  sit  at  table,  they  do  not  sit  on 
chairs  or  stools,  nor  upon  an  elevated  turf,  nor 
yet  upon  the  bare  ground,  but  on  the  leaves  of 
a  certain  tree;  they  were  not  willing  to  tell  of 
what  tree  the  leaves  were,  but  when  I  guessed 
at  several,  and  at  last  named  the  leaves  of  the 
fig-tree,  they  affirmed  that  to  be  the  tree. 
They  said  moreover,  that  they  did  not  dress 
their  food  with  any  view  to  gratify  the  palate, 
but  chiefly  with  a  view  to  wholesomeness,  and 
that  the  food  which  was  wholesome  was  also 
savoury.  In  a  conversation  which  took  place 
amongst  the  spirits  on  this  subject,  it  was  urged, 
that  it  would  be  well  for  man  to  prepare  his 
food  according  to  this  rule,  for  by  so  doing  he 
would  shew  his  attention  to  the  health  of  his 
mind  and  body  at  the  same  time ;  whereas, 
when  the  gratification  of  the  palate  is  the  chief 
thing  attended  to,  the  bodily  health  is  fre- 
quently lost  thereby,  at  least  loses  much  of  its 


60 


inward  vigour,  and  consequently  the  mind  also 
is  affected,  inasmuch  as  the  exertions  of  the 
mind  depend  on  the  interior  stale  of  the  reci- 
pient bodily  parts,  as  seeing  and  hearing  de- 
pend on  the  state  of  the  eye  and  ear;  hence  the 
madness  of  supposing,  that  all  the  delight  of  life 
consists  in  luxury  and  pleasurable  indulgences; 
hence  also  comes  dulness  and  stupidity  in 
things  which  require  thought  and  judgment, 
whilst  the  mind  is  disposed  only  for  the  exer- 
tions of  cunning  and  contrivance  respecting 
bodily  and  worldly  things ;  hereby  man  acquires 
a  brutal  image  and  likeness,  and  therefore  such 
persons  are  not  improperly  compared  with 
brutes. 

59.  Their  habitations  were  also  shewn  me; 
they  are  low,  and  constructed  of  wood,  but 
within  they  are  coated  over  with  bark  of  a 
palish  blue  colour,  the  walls  and  ceiling  being 
spotted  as  with  small  stars,  to  represent  the 
heavens;  for  they  are  fond  of  thus  picturing  the 
visible  heavens  and  stars  in  the  insides  of  their 
houses,  because  they  believe  the  stars  to  be 
the  abodes  of  angels.  They  have  also  tents, 
which  are  rounded  above,  and  stretched  out  to 
a  considerable  length,  spotted  likewise  within 
with  little  stars  in  a  blue  plane ;  into  these  they 
betake  themselves  in  the  middle  of  the  day,  to 
prevent  their  faces  suffering  from  the  heat  of 
the  sun.    They  are  very  attentive  to  the  con- 


61 


struction,  neatness,  and  cleanliness  of  these 
their  tents :  they  have  also  their  meals  in  them. 

60.  When  the  spirits  of  Jupiter  saw  the 
horses  of  this  earth,  the  horses  appeared  to  me 
of  a  less  size  than  usual,  although  they  were 
tolerably  robust  and  large ;  this  was  in  conse- 
quence of  the  idea  of  those  spirits  concerning 
the  horses  they  saw;  they  said,  that  they  also 
had  horses  amongst  them,  but  of  a  much  larger 
size,  and  that  tliey  were  wild,  running  at  large 
in  the  woods,  and  that  when  they  come  in  sight, 
the  inhabitants  are  terrified,  although  they 
never  suffer  any  hurt  from  them;  they  added, 
that  the  fear  of  horses  is  innate  or  natural  to 
them.  This  led  me  to  a  consideration  of  the 
j  cause  of  that  fear,  and  it  seemed  to  be  grounded 
in  the  spiritual  signification  of  horses ;  for  a 
horse  in  a  spiritual  sense  signifies  the  intellect- 
ual principle  formed  of  scientifics,  (aa)  and 
inasmuch  as  the  inhabitants  of  Jupiter  are  afraid 
of  cultivating  the  intellectual  principle  by  world- 
ly sciences,  hence  comes  an  influx  of  the  fear 
of  horses.  That  they  pay  no  attention  to  sci- 
entifics, which  appertain  to  human  erudition, 
will  be  seen  presendy. 

(aa)  That  horse  signifies  the  intellectual  prin- 
ciple, n.  2760,  2761,  2762,  3217,  5321,6125, 
6400,  6534,  7024,  8146,  8148.  And  that  the 
white  horse  in  the  Revelation  signifies  the  un- 
derstanding of  the  Word,  n.  2760. 
13 


62 


61.  The  spirits  of  the  earth  Jupiter  are  not 
willing  to  associate  with  the  spirits  of  our  earth, 
because  they  differ  both  in  minds  and  manners  j 
they  say  that  the  spirits  of  our  earth  are  cunning, 
and  that  they  are  prompt  and  ingenious  in  the 
contrivance  of  evil;  and  that  they  know  and 
think  little  about  what  is  good.  Moreover,  the 
spirits  of  the  earth  Jupiter  are  much  wiser  than 
the  spirits  of  our  earth ;  they  say  also  of  our 
spirits,  that  they  talk  much  and  think  little,  and 
thus  that  they  are  not  capable  of  an  interior  per- 
ception of  many  things,  not  even  of  what  is  good ; 
hence  they  conclude,  that  the  men  of  our  earth 
are  external  men.  On  a  time  also  it  was  per- 
mitted the  spirits  of  our  earth,  by  their  wicked 
arts,  to  act  upon  and  infest  the  spirits  of  Jupiter 
who  were  with  me  ;  the  latter  endured  such  ac- 
tion for  a  considerable  time,  but  at  length  con- 
fessed that  they  could  endure  no  longer,  and 
that  they  believed  it  impossible  for  worse  spirits 
to  exist,  inasmuch  as  they  perverted  their  ima- 
gination and  also  their  thoughts  in  such  a  man- 
ner, that  they  seemed  to  themselves  as  it  were 
bound,  and  that  they  could  not  be  extricated 
and  set  at  liberty  without  divine  aid.  Whilst  I 
was  reading  in  the  Word  some  passages  concern- 
ing our  Saviour's  passion,  certain  European 
spirits  infused  dreadful  scandals,  with  intent  to 
seduce  the  spirits  of  Jupiter.  Inquiry  was  made 
who  they  were,  and  what  had  been  their  profess- 


63 

ion  in  the  world,  and  it  was  discovered  that  some 
of  them  had  been  preachers,  and  that  the  greater 
part  were  of  those  who  call  themselves  of  the 
Lord's  society,  or  Jesuits  ;  I  said,  that  they,  dur- 
ing their  abode  in  the  world,  by  their  preach- 
ing concerning  the  Lord's  passion,  were  able 
to  move  the  vulgar  to  tears;  I  furiher  added 
what  was  the  cause  of  the  difference  between 
what  they  appeared  to  be  in  the  world,  and 
what  they  were  at  present,  viz.  that  in  the  world 
their  thoughts  and  their  words  were  at  variance, 
consequently  they  entertained  one  opinion  in 
their  hearts,  and  professed  another  with  their 
lips,  but  that  now  they  are  not  allowed  to  speak 
under  such  disguise,  for  in  becoming  spirits, 
they  are  compelled  to  speak  in  all  respects  as 
they  think.  The  spirits  of  Jupiter  expressed 
the  utmost  astonishment  at  hearing  of  such  va- 
riance between  men's  interiors  and  exteriors, 
and  that  they  were  able  to  think  one  thing  and 
say  another,  which  to  themselves  (viz.  the  spirits 
of  Jupiter)  was  impossible.  They  were  surpris- 
ed also,  when  they  were  informed  that  great 
numbers,  who  are  froin  our  earth,  become  an- 
gels, and  that  such  are  in  heart  altogether  dif- 
ferent from  the  above  spirits  ;  for  they  imagin- 
ed at  that  instant,  that  in  our  earth  all  were 
like  the  spirits  then  present;  but  they  were  in- 
formed, that  there  are  not  many  of  such  a 
character,  and  that  there  are  also  some  whose 
14 


64 


thoughts  are  under  the  influence  of  goodness, 
and  not  of  evil  like  the  above,  and  that  all 
whose  thoughts  are  under  the  influence  of 
goodness  become  angels.  To  convince  them 
that  this  was  the  case,  there  came  choirs  out  of 
heaven,  consisting  of  angels  from  our  earth, 
one  choir  after  another,  who  together  with  one 
voice  and  in  harmonious  concert  glorified  the 
Lord.  Those  choirs  affected  the  spirits  of 
Jupiter  who  were  present  with  such  delight, 
that  they  seemed  to  themselves  to  be  caught 
up  as  it  were  into  heaven.  The  glorificadon 
by  the  choirs  (6i)  lasted  about  an  hour.  It 
was  given  me  to  perceive  sensibly  a  communi- 
cation of  the  delights  occasioned  thereby.  The 
spirits  of  Jupiter  said,  that  they  would  relate 
what  had  happened  to  the  other  spirits  from 
their  eardi,  who  were  in  other  parts  of  the 
spiritual  world. 

62.  The  inhabitants  of  the  earth  Jupiter 
make  wisdom  to  consist  in  thinking  well  and 
justly  on  all  occurrences  in  life;  they  imbibe 
this  wisdom  from  their  parents  at  an  early  age, 

(bb)  That  it  is  called  a  chorus  or  choir,  when 
several  spirits  speak  together  and  unanimously, 
concerning  which  see  n.  2595,  2596,  3350.  That 
in  their  speech  there  is  an  harmonious  agree- 
ment, concerning  which  see  n.  1649,  1649. 
That  by  choirs  in  another  life  there  is  a  prepara- 
tion for  and  introduction  to  unanimity,  n.  5182. 


65 


and  it  is  successively  transmitted  to  posterity, 
receiving  an  increase  in  each  generation  from 
tlie  love  thereof,  in  consideration  of  its  having 
been  the  wisdom  of  their  forefathers.  They 
are  altogether  unacquainted  with  the  sciences, 
such  as  are  cultivated  on  our  earth,  nor  have 
they  any  desire  to  be  acquainted  with  them ; 
they  call  them  shades,  and  compare  them  to 
clouds  which  intercept  the  light  of  the  sun; 
this  idea  concerning  the  sciences  they  have 
conceived,  in  consequence  of  some  spirits  from 
our  earth  boasting  that  they  were  wise  by  rea- 
son of  their  skill  in  the  sciences.  The  spirits 
from  our  earth,  who  thus  boasted,  were  such 
as  made  wisdom  to  consist  in  things  appertain- 
ing merely  to  the  memory,  as  in  languages,  es- 
pecially the  Hebrew,  Greek,  and  Latin,  in  a 
knowledge  of  all  important  j)articulars  respect- 
ing the  learned  world,  in  criticism,  in  bare  ex- 
perimental discoveries,  and  in  terms,  particu- 
larly such  as  are  philosophical,  with  other 
things  of  a  like  nature,  not  using  such  things 
as  means  leading  to  wisdom,  but  making  wis- 
dom to  consist  in  the  things  themselves;  such 
persons,  inasmuch  as  they  have  not  cultivated 
their  rational  faculty  by  the  sciences,  as  by 
means  leading  to  wisdom,  have  little  percep- 
tion in  another  life,  for  they  see  only  in  terms, 
and  from  terms,  in  which  case  those  things  are 
as  clots  and  clouds  obstructing  the  intellectual 


66 


sight,  see  above,  n.  38;  and  they  who  have 
been  vain  and  conceited  by  reason  of  their 
erudition  thus  grounded,  have  still  less  percep- 
tion; but  they  who  have  used  the  sciences  as 
means  of  invalidating  and  annihilating  the 
things  appertaining  to  the  church  and  to  faith, 
are  found  to  have  totally  destroyed  their  intel- 
lectual principle,  in  consequence  whereof  they 
see  in  the  dark  like  owls,  mistaking  what  is 
false  for  what  is  tme,  and  what  is  evil  for  what 
is  good.  The  spirits  of  Jupiter,  from  the  con- 
versation they  had  with  such,  concluded,  that 
the  sciences  occasion  a  shade  in  the  intellect, 
and  tend  to  make  it  bhnd ;  but  they  were  in- 
formed, that  on  our  earth  the  sciences  are 
means  of  opening  the  intellectual  sight,  which 
sight  is  in  the  ligbt  of  heaven,  but  inasmuch  as 
there  is  a  prevalence  of  such  things  as  apper- 
tain to  the  mere  natural  and  sensual  life,  there- 
fore the  sciences  to  the  men  of  our  earth  are 
means  of  becoming  unwise,  or  of  confirming 
them  in  favour  of  nature  against  divine  agency, 
and  in  favour  of  the  world  against  heaven. 
They  were  further  informed,  that  the  sciences 
in  themselves  are  spiritual  riches,  and  that  they 
who  possess  them  are  like  those  who  possess 
worldly  riches,  which  in  like  manner  are  means 
whereby  man  may  do  service  to  himself,  his 
neighbour,  and  his  country,  and  whereby  also 
he  may  do  mischief;  moreover  that  they  are 


G7 


like  dress,  which  serves  for  use  and  ornament, 
and  also  for  the  nourishing  of  pride  and  vanity, 
as  in  the  case  of  those  who  would  be  honour- 
ed for  their  fine  clothes.  This  was  perfectly 
intelligible  to  the  spirits  of  Jupiter ;  but  they 
were  siu-prised  at  the  inhabitants  of  our  earth, 
that,  being  men,  they  should  rest  in  means, 
and  prefer  things  leading  to  wisdom  before 
wisdom  itself;  and  that  they  should  not  see, 
that  to  immerse  the  mind  in  such  things,  and 
not  to  elevate  it  above  them,  was  to  becloud 
and  blind  it. 

63.  A  certain  spirit  at  that  instant,  rising 
from  the  lower  earth,  came  to  me  and  said, 
that  he  had  heard  what  I  had  been  discoursing 
upon  with  other  spirits,  but  that  he  did  not  un- 
derstand at  all  what  was  said  concerning  spirit- 
ual life  and  the  light  thereof.  He  was  asked 
wliether  he  was  willing  to  be  instructed  on  that 
head?  He  said  that  he  did  not  come  with  any 
such  intention  :  hence  it  was  given  to  conclude, 
that  he  would  not  comprehend  what  might  be 
said  on  the  subject.  He  was  exceedingly 
stupid,  yet  it  was  declared  by  the  angels,  that, 
during  his  abode  in  the  world,  he  was  much 
celebrated  for  his  learning.  He  was  cold,  as 
was  manifestly  perceived  from  his  breathing, 
which  was  a  sign  of  an  illumination  merely  na- 
tural, and  of  none  spiritual,  consequently  that 


68 


by  the  sciences  he  had  not  opened,  but  closed 
his  way  to  the  light  of  heaven. 

64.  Inasmuch  as  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth 
Jupiter  procure  intelligence  for  themselves  by 
a  different  way  from  the  inhabitants  of  our 
earth,  and  are  moreover  of  a  different  genius 
and  temper  as  grounded  in  the  life,  therefore 
they  cannot  abide  long  together,  but  either 
shun  or  remove  each  other.  There  are 
spheres,  which  may  be  called  spiritual  spheres, 
which  continually  flow  forth,  yea,  overflow 
from  every  spirit;  they  flow  from  the  active 
principle  of  the  affections  and  consequent 
thoughts,  thus  from  the  life  itself;  (cc)  all  con- 
sociations in  another  life  are  regulated  accord- 
ing to  these  spheres,  those  which  agree  being 
joined  together  according  to  their  agreement, 
and  those  which  disagree  being  separated  ac- 
cording to  their  disagreement.  The  spirits 
and  angels,  who  are  from  the  earth  Jupiter,  in 

(cc)  That  a  spiritual  sphere,  which  is  the 
sphere  of  the  life,  flows  forth  and  overflows  from 
every  man,  spirit  and  angel,  and  encompasses 
them  about,  n.  4464,  5179,  7454.  That  it  flows 
forth  from  the  life  of  their  affections  and  conse- 
quent thoughts,  n.  2489,  4464,  6206.  That  in 
another  life  consociations  and  also  dissociations 
are  regulated  according  to  spheres,  n.  6206, 
9606,  9607,  10312. 


69 


the  grand  man  have  relation  to  the  imagina- 
tive PRINCIPLE  OF  THOUGHT,  and  Conse- 
quently to  an  active  state  of  the  interior  parts  ; 
but  the  spirits  of  our  earth  have  relation  to  the 
various  functions  of  the  exterior  parts  of  the 
body,  and  when  these  are  desirous  to  have 
dominion,  the  active  or  imaginative  principle 
of  thought  from  the  interior  cannot  flow  in  : 
hence  come  the  oppositions  between  the 
spheres  of  the  life  of  each. 

65.  As  to  what  concerns  their  divine  wor- 
ship, it  is  a  principal  characteristic  thereof, 
that  they  acknowledge  our  Lord  as  the  Su- 
preme, who  governs  heaven  and  earth,  calling 
him  the  only  Lord;  and  inasmuch  as  they 
acknowledge  and  worship  him  during  their  life 
in  the  body,  they  hence  seek  him  after  death, 
and  find  him ;  he  is  the  same  with  our  Lord. 
They  were  asked,  whether  they  know  that  the 
ONLY  Lord  is  a  man?  They  replied,  that  they 
all  know  that  he  is  a  man,  because  in  their 
world  he  has  been  seen  by  many  as  a  man; 
and  that  he  instructs  them  concerning  the 
truth,  preserves  them,  and  also  gives  eternal 
life  to  those  who  worship  him  from  a  principle 
of  good.  They  said  further,  that  it  is  reveal- 
ed to  them  from  him,  how  they  should  live, 
and  how  believe;  and  that  what  is  revealed, 
is  handed  down  from  parents  to  children,  and 
hence  there  flows  forth  doctrine  to  all  the  la- 


70 


milies,  and  thereby  to  the  whole  nation  •which 
is  descended  from  one  father.  They  added, 
that  it  seems  to  them  as  if  tl)ey  had  the  doc- 
trine written  on  their  minds,  and  they  conclude 
so  from  this  circumstance,  because  they  per- 
ceive instantly,  and  acknowledge  as  of  them- 
selves, whether  it  be  true  or  not  what  is  said 
by  others  concerning  the  hfe  of  heaven  in  man. 
They  do  not  know  that  their  only  Lord  was 
born  a  man  on  our  earth;  they  said,  that  it  is 
of  no  concern  to  them  to  know  it,  only  that  he 
is  a  man,  and  governs  the  universe.  When  I 
informed  them,  that  on  our  earth  lie  is  named 
Christ  Jesus,  and  that  Christ  signifies  anointed 
or  king,  and  Jesus,  saviour,  they  said  that  they 
do  not  worship  him  as  a  king,  because  king 
suggests  the  idea  of  what  is  worldly,  but  that 
they  worship  him  as  a  Saviour.  On  this  oc- 
casion a  doubt  was  injected  from  the  spirits  of 
our  earth,  whether  their  only 'Lord  was  the 
same  with  our  Lord,  but  they  removed  it  by 
the  recollection  that  they  had  seen  him  in 
the  sun,  and  had  acknowledged  that  it  was 
he  himself  whom  they  saw  on  their  earth, 
see  above,  n.  40.  On  a  time  also  the  spirits 
of  Jupiter,  who  were  with  me,  were  seized 
with  a  momentary  doubt,  whether  their  only 
Lord  was  the  same  with  our  Lord ;  but  this 
doubt,  which  was  instantaneously  injected,  was 
abo  instantaneously  dispersed ;  it  was  suggested 


71 


by  an  influx  from  some  spirits  of  our  earth ;  and 
vvliat  surprised  me  much  on  this  occasion,  the 
spirits  of  Jupiter  were  so  asiiamed  of  them- 
selves, for  having  doubted  herein,  though  but 
for  a  moment,  that  they  requested  me  not  to 
publish  it,  lest  they  should  be  charged  with  any 
incredulity,  when  yet  they  were  now  convinced 
'  of  the  truth  more  than  others.  They  were 
most  exceedingly  afiected  and  rejoiced  when 
they  heard  it  declared,  that  the  only  Lord  is 
alone  man,  and  that  all  have  from  him  what 
entitles  them  to  be  called  men  ;  but  that  they 
are  only  so  far  men,  as  they  are  images  of  him, 
that  is,  as  they  love  him,  and  love  their  neigh- 
bour, consequently  as  they  are  principled  in 
good  ;  for  the  good  of  love  and  faith  is  an 
image  of  the  Lord. 

66.  There  were  with  me  some  spirits  of  the 
earth  Jupiter,  whilst  I  was  reading  the  seven- 
teenth chapter  in  John,  concerning  the  Lord's 
love,  and  concerning  his  glorification  ;  and  when 
they  heard  the  contents,  an  holy  influence  seiz- 
ed them,  and  they  confesed  that  all  things  there- 
in were  divine  :  but  at  that  instant,  some  spiritsof 
our  earth,  who  were  infidels,  suggested  various 
1  scandals,  saying,  that  he  was  born  an  infant, 
j  lived  as  a  man,  appeared  as  another  man,  was 
||  crucified,  with  other  circumstances  of  a  like 
if  nature:  but  the  spirits  of  the  earth  Jupiter  paid 
no  attention  to  these  suggestions  j  they  said, 


72 


that  such  are  their  devils,  whom  they  abhor ;  ad- 
ding, tliat  notliing  of  a  celestial  principle  has 
any  place  in  their  minds,  but  only  an  earthly 
principle,  which  they  called  dross;  and  which 
they  said  they  had  discovered  from  this  circum- 
stance, that  when  mention  was  made  of  going 
naked  on  their  earth,  obscene  ideas  immediately 
occupied  their  thoughts,  and  they  paid  no  at- 
tention to  their  celestial  hfe,  which  was  also 
spoken  of  at  the  same  time. 

67.  The  clear  perception,  which  the  spirits 
of  Jupiter  have  concerning  spiritual  things,  was 
made  manifest  to  me  from  their  manner  of  re- 
presenting how  the  Lord  converts  depraved  af- 
fections into  good  affections :  they  represented 
the  intellectual  mind  as  a  beautiful  form,  and 
impressed  upon  it  an  activity  suitable  to  the 
form  answering  to  the  life  of  affection ;  this  they 
executed  in  a  manner  which  no  words  can  de- 
scribe, and  with  such  dexterity  that  they  were 
commended  by  the  angels.  There  were  present 
on  this  occasion  some  of  the  learned  ffom  our 
earth,  who  had  immersed  the  intellectual  prin- 
ciple in  scientific  terms,  and  had  thought  and 
written  much  about  form,  about  substance, 
about  materiality  and  immateriality,  and  the 
like,  without  applying  such  things  to  any  use; 
these  could  not  even  comprehend  that  repre- 
sentation. 

68.  They  are  exceedingly  cautious  on  their 


73 


earth,  lest  any  one  should  fall  into  wrong  opin- 
ions concerning  the  only  Lord  ;  and  if  they 
observe  that  any  begin  to  think  not  rightly  con- 
cerning him,  they  first  admonish,  then  use 
threats,  and  lastly  deter  by  punishment  :  they 
said,  that  they  had  observed,  if  any  such  wrong 
opinions  insinuate  themselves  into  any  family, 
that  family  is  taken  from  amongst  them,  not  by 
the  punishment  of  death  inflicted  by  their  fel- 
lows, but  by  being  deprived  of  respiration,  and 
consequently  of  life,  by  spirits,  when  they  have 
first  threatened  them  with  death  :  for  in  that 
earth  spirits  speak  with  the  inhabitants,  and 
chastise  them  if  they  have  done  evil,  and  even 
if  they  have  intended  to  do  evil,  of  which  we 
shall  say  more  presently  ;  hence  if  they  think 
evil  concerning  the  only  Lord,  and  do  not 
repent,  they  are  threatened  with  death.  In 
this  manner  the  worship  of  the  Lord,  who  to 
the  inhabitants  of  that  earth  is  the  Supreme 
Divinity,  is  preserved  pure. 

69.  They  said,  that  they  have  no  particular 
days  set  apart  for  divine  worship,  but  that  every 
morning  at  sunrise,  and  every  evening  at  sun- 
setting,  they  perform  holy  worship  to  their  only 
Lord  in  their  tents;  and  that  they  also  sing 
psalms  after  their  manner. 

70.  I  was  further  informed,  that  in  that  earth 
there  are  also  some  who  call  themselves  saints, 
and  who  command  their  servants,  of  whom  they 

15 


74 


wnsh  to  have  great  numbers,  to  give  them  the 
title  of  lords,  threatening  them  with  punishment 
if  they  omit  it ;  they  hkeu  ise  forbid  their  ser- 
vants to  adore  the  Lord  of  the  universe,  saying 
that  themselves  arc  lords  mediators,  and  that 
they  will  present  the  supplications  of  others  to 
the  Lord  of  the  universe.  They  call  the  Lord 
of  the  universe,  who  is  our  Lord,  not  the  only 
Lord,  as  the  rest  do,  hut  the  supreme  Lord,  by 
reason  that  they  call  themselves  also  lords. 
The  sun  of  the  world  they  call  the  face  of  the 
supreme  Lord,  and  believe  that  his  abode  is 
there,  wherefore  they  also  adore  the  sun.  The 
rest  of  the  inhabitants  hold  them  in  aversion, 
and  are  unwilling  to  converse  with  them,  as  well 
because  they  adore  the  sun,  as  because  they 
call  themselves  lords,  and  are  w'orshipped  by 
their  servants  as  mediatory  gods.  There  was 
shewn  me  by  the  spirits  the  covering  of  their 
head,  which  was  a  tufted  cap  of  a  darkish  co- 
lour. In  the  other  life  such  appear  to  the  left 
in  a  certain  altitude,  and  there  sit  as  idols,  and 
for  some  time  are  also  worshipped  by  the  serv- 
ants who  have  attended  upon  them,  but  are  af- 
terwards held  in  derision  by  the  same  servants. 
What  surprised  me  was,  that  their  faces  shine 
there  as  by  the  light  of  a  fire,  which  is  in  con- 
sequence of  their  having  believed  that  they  were 
saints;  but  notwithstanding  this  fiery  appear- 
ance of  their  faces,  they  are  nevertheless  cold, 


75 


and  have  an  intense  desire  to  be  made  warm; 
hence  it  is  evident  that  the  fire,  whereby  they 
seem  to  shine,  is  the  fire  of  self-love  and  a  false 
fire.  In  order  to  make  themselves  warm,  they 
seem  to  themselves  to  cut  wood,  and  whilst 
they  are  thus  employed,  there  appears  under- 
neath the  wood  something  of  a  man,  whom  at 
the  same  time  they  attempt  to  strike;  this  ap- 
pearance is  in  consequence  of  their  attributing 
to  themselves  merit  and  sanctity,  for  all  who  do 
so  in  this  life,,  seem  to  themselves  in  another 
life  to  cut  wood,  as  was  the  case  likewise  with 
some  spirits  from  our  earth,  whom  we  have 
spoken  of  elsewhere  :  for  the  further  illustration 
of  this  subject,  I  shall  here  adduce  what  has 
been  experimentally  made  known  to  me:  "  In 
the  lower  earth,  beneath  the  soles  of  the  feet, 
are  those  who  have  placed  merit  in  their  good 
deeds  and  works;  several  of  them  appear  to 
themselves  to  cut  wood  ;  the  place  vvliere  they 
are  collected  is  very  cold,  and  they  seem  to 
themselves  to  acquire  warr?ith  by  their  labour : 
I  have  also  discoursed  with  them,  and  it  was 
given  me  to  ask  them  whether  they  had  any 
inclination  to  leave  that  place?  They  replied, 
that  as  yet  they  had  not  merited  it  by  their  la- 
bour: when  that  state  however  is  finished  and 
past,  they  are  taken  away  thence :  all  such  spirits 
are  in  a  mere  natural  state,  inasmuch  as  in  the 
desire  of  meriting  salvation  there  is  nothing  of 


76 


a  spiritual  principle,  such  desire  originating  in 
self  and  not  in  the  Lord;  moreover  such  prefer 
themselves  above  others,  and  in  some  cases 
despise  others ;  and  if  in  another  life  they  do  not 
receive  more  bliss  than  others,  they  have  indig- 
nation against  the  Lord,  wherefore  whilst  they 
are  cutting  wood,  it  appears  as  if  somewhat  of 
the  Lord  was  underneath  the  wood ;  this  is  in 
consequence  of  their  indignation."  [dd) 

71.  It  is  common  in  the  Earth  Jupiter  for 
spirits  to  discourse  with  the  inhabitants,  to  in- 
struct them,  and  also  to  chastise  ti)em  if  they 
have  done  evil;  on  which  subject  I  wish  to  be 
more  particular,  as  several  things  were  related 
to  me  by  their  angels  concerning  it.  The 
reason  why  spirits  in  that  earth  discourse  with 
men  is,  because  they  think  much  about  hea- 
ven and  a  life  after  death;  and  because  re- 
spectively they  are  little  solicitous  about  the 


(dd)  That  the  Lord  alone  has  merit  and 
righteousness,  n.  9715,  9975,  9979,  9981,  9982. 
That  such  as  place  merit  in  their  works,  or  wish 
to  merit  heaven  by  their  good  deeds,  in  another 
life  wish  to  be  served,  and  are  in  no  wise  con- 
tended, n.  6393.  That  they  despise  their  neigh- 
bour, and  are  angry  at  the  Lord  himself,  if  they 
do  not  receive  a  reward,  n.  9976.  What  their 
lot  is  in  another  life,  n.  942,  1774,  1877,  2027. 
That  they  are  of  those  who  in  the  lower  earth 
appear  to  cut  wood,  n.  1110,  4943. 


77 


,  present  life;  for  they  know  that  they  shall  live 
after  their  decease,  and  in  a  happy  state,  ac- 
cording to  the  state  of  their  internal  man  form- 
ed in  the  world.  To  discourse  with  spirits 
and  angels  was  also  common  on  tliis  earth  in 
ancient  times,  and  for  the  same  reason,  viz. 
because  they  then  thought  much  of  heaven 
and  little  of  the  world  :  but  that  living  com- 

I  munication  with  heaven  in  process  of  time  was 
closed,  as  man  from  internal  became  external, 
or  what  is  the  same  thing,  as  he  began  to  think 
much  about  the  world  and  little  about  heaven ; 
and  especially  when  he  ceased  to  behave  in  the 
existence  of  heaven  or  hell,  and  that  in  himself 
there  was  a  spiritual  man  which  would  live 
after  death :  for  at  this  day  it  is  believed  that 
the  body  lives  by  a  virtue  of  its  own,  and  not 
by  virtue  of  its  spirit ;  wherefore  unless  man 
now  entertained  a  belief  that  he  should  rise 
again  with  his  natural  body,  lie  would  have  no 
belief  at  all  about  a  resurrection. 

72.  As  to  what  particularly  concerns  the 
presence  of  spirits  with  the  inhabitants  of  Ju- 
piter, there  are  some  spirits  who  chastise, 
some  who  instruct,  and  some  who  rule  over 
them.  The  spirits  who  chastise  apply  them- 
selves to  the  left  side,  and  incline  themselves 
towards  the  back,  and  when  they  are  there, 
they  press  forth  from  man's  memory  all  that 
he  has  done  or  thought;  for  this  is  an  easy 
16 


78 


thing  to  spirits,  inasmuch  as  when  they  come 
to  man,  they  enter  into  all  his  memory,  [i)  If 
they  find  that  lie  has  done  evil,  or  has  thought 
evil,  they  reprove  him,  and  also  chastise  him 
by  pain  in  the  joints  of  his  feet  or  hands,  or 
about  the  region  of  the  belly;  this  all  spirits 
can  effect  with  much  dexterity  when  they  are 
permitted;  on  the  approach  of  such  spirits  to 
man,  he  is  struck  with  horror  attended  with 
fear,  and  hence  he  is  aware  of  their  coming. 
Fear  may  be  excited  in  any  person  by  evil 
spirits,  on  their  approach,  especially  by  those, 
who,  during  their  abode  in  the  world,  have 
been  thieves  and  robbers.  In  order  that  I 
might  know  how  those  spirits  act,  when  they 
come  to  a  man  of  their  own  earth,  it  was  per- 
mitted that  such  a  spirit  should  also  come  to 
me:  when  he  was  near,  horror  attended  with 
fear  manifestly  affected  me,  yet  it  was  not  an 
interior  but  exterior  horror,  because  I  was 
aware  of  the  spirit  from  whom  it  proceeded ; 
he  was  also  seen  by  me,  and  appeared  as  a 
darkish  cloud  with  moveable  stars  in  it;  move- 
able stars  signify  falsities,  but  fixed  stars 
truths,  (w)  He  applied  himself  to  my  left  side 
towards  the  back,  and  likewise  began  to  re- 
prove me  on  account  of  things  done  and 
thought,  which  he  produced  from  my  tnemory, 
and  also  interpreted  unfavourably  ;  but  he  was 
checked  by  the  angels.    When  he  perceived 


79 


that  he  was  with  a  man  who  did  not  belong  to 
his  own  earth,  he  began  to  discourse  with  me, 
saying  that  when  he  came  to  any  man,  he 
knew  all  and  singiihir  the  tilings  which  he  was 
doing  and  thinking;  also  that  he  severely  re- 
proved him,  and  likewise  chastised  him  by 
various  pains.  At  another  time  again  such  a 
chastising  spirit  came  to  me,  and  ajiplied  him- 
self to  my  left  side  below  the  middle  of  the 
body,  like  the  former,  and  also  desired  to 
punish  me;  but  he  likewise  was  restrained  by 
the  angels;  he  shewed  me  however  the  kinds 
of  punishment,  which  they  are  permitted  to  in- 
flict on  the  men  of  their  earth,  if  they  do  evil, 
or  intend  to  do  evil ;  besides  pains  of  the  jointst 
they  cause  also  a  painful  compression  about 
the  middle  of  the  belly,  which  seems  as  if  i, 
proceeded  from  a  tight  sharp  belt ;  likewise  a 
cessation  of  respiration  at  times,  even  to  appa- 
rent suffocation  ;  another  kind  of  punishment  is 
that  of  proliibilion,  whereby  the  person  punish- 
ed is  forbid  eating  any  thing  but  bread  for  a 
time;  lastly,  death  is  denounced,  in  case  the 
offender  does  not  cease  from  his  evil  acts  and 
intentions,  and  at  the  same  time  he  is  deprived 
of  all  satisfaction  arising  from  the  company  of 
his  wife,  his  children,  and  associates;  grief  also 
is  insinuated  on  such  occasions  by  reason  of 
such  deprivation. 

73.  The  spirits  who  instruct,  apply  them- 
17 


80 


selves  to  the  left  side  of  the  persons  instruct- 
ed, but  more  to  the  front;  they  reprove  like- 
wise, but  mildly,  and  presently  teach  them  how 
they  ought  to  live :  they  appear  also  of  a  dark- 
ish hue,  yet  not  like  clouds  as  the  former,  but 
as  if  they  were  clad  in  sackcloth :  these  are 
called  instructors,  but  the  former  chastisers. 
When  the  instructing  spirits  are  present,  angelic 
spirits  are  present  also,  sitting  close  to  the 
head,  and  filling  it  in  a  peculiar  manner;  their 
presence  likewise  is  perceived  there  like  a  mild 
and  gentle  aspiration,  for  they  are  afraid  of 
man's  perceiving  the  least  pain  or  anxiety  from 
their  approach  and  influx:  they  govern  the 
chastising  and  instructing  spirits,  preventing 
the  former  from  putting  man  to  more  pain  than 
is  permitted  by  the  Lord,  and  prompting  the 
latter  to  teach  what  is  true.  During  the  time 
that  a  chastising  spirit  was  with  me,  there  were 
present  also  angelic  spirits,  who  kept  my  coun- 
tenance in  a  constant  smile  and  cheerfulness, 
and  the  region  about  the  lips  prominent,  and 
my  mouth  a  little  open;  this  tlie  angels  easily 
effect  by  influx,  when  it  is  permitted  of  the 
Lord.  They  said,  that  with  the  inhabitants  of 
their  earth,  they  induce  such  a  countenance 
when  they  are  present. 

74.  If  man  after  chastisement  and  instruc- 
tion again  does  evil,  or  thinks  to  do  evil,  and 
does  not  check  himself  by  the  precepts  of  truth, 


81 


when  the  chastising  spirit  returns,  he  is  punish- 
ed more  severely :  but  the  angelic  spirits  mo- 
derate the  punishment  according  to  the  inten- 
tion in  what  was  done,  and  according  to  the 
will-principle  in  what  was  thought.  Hence  it 
may  appear,  that  their  angels,  who  sit  at  the 
head,  exercise  a  species  of  judicatory  power 
over  man,  inasmuch  as  they  permit,  moderate, 
restrain,  and  operate  by  influx;  but  it  was  de- 
clared, that  they  do  not  judge,  but  that  the 
Lord  alone  is  judge,  and  that  from  him  into 
them  flow  all  things  which  they  enjoin  to  the 
chastising  and  instructing  spirits,  and  that  it 
appears  as  if  it  was  from  them. 

75.  In  the  earth  Jupiter  spirits  speak  with 
man,  but  man  in  his  turn  does  not  speak  with 
spirits,  only  these  words  when  he  is  instruct- 
ed, /  will  do  so  no  more  :  nor  is  it  allowed  him 
to  tell  any  one  that  a  spirit  has  spoken  with 
him,  for  if  he  does  this  he  is  afterwards  pun- 
ished. Those  spirits  of  Jupiter,  when  they 
were  with  me,  supposed  at  first  that  they  were 
with  a  man  of  their  own  earth;  but  when  I 
spake  with  them  again,  and  when  they  perceiv- 
ed that  I  had  thoughts  of  publishing  what  pass- 
ed between  us,  and  thus  of  telling  it  to  others, 
that  it  was  not  allowed  them  either  to  chastise 
or  instruct  me  for  so  doing,  they  then  disco- 
vered that  they  were  with  a  stranger. 

76.  There  are  two  signs  which  appear  to 


82 


those  spirits,  during  their  abode  with  man ; 
they  see  an  elderly  man  [virum)  of  a  fair  coun- 
tenance, which  is  a  sign  to  them  to  speak  no- 
thing but  what  is  true,  and  to  do  nothing  but 
what  is  just.  They  see  also  a  face  in  a  win- 
dow, which  is  a  sign  to  them  to  depart  thence. 
Such  an  elderly  man  also  appeared  to  me,  and 
likewise  a  face  was  seen  in  a  window,  and  on 
seeing  the  face  those  spirits  immediately  de- 
parted from  me. 

77.  Besides  the  spirits  above  mentioned, 
there  are  also  spirits  who  suggest  contrary  per- 
suasions; these  are  they  who,  during  their 
abode  in  the  world,  were  banished  from  the 
Society  of  the  rest  on  account  of  their  wicked- 
ness. When  they  approach,  there  appears  as 
it  were  a  flying  fire,  which  passes  downwards 
near  the  face :  they  place  themselves  beneath 
near  man's  back  parts,  and  speak  thence  to- 
wards the  upper  parts.  What  they  say  is  di- 
rectly contrary  to  the  instructions  which  the 
instructer  spirit  gave  from  the  angels,  and  is  to 
this  purport,  that  they  need  not  live  according 
to  instruction,  but  according  to  their  own  will 
and  pleasure,  without  any  check  or  restraint. 
They  generally  make  their  approach  as  soon 
as  the  former  spirits  are  departed ;  but  the  men 
on  that  earth  are  aware  who  and  what  those 
spirits  are,  and  therefore  are  unconcerned 
about  them ;  nevertheless  they  are  taught  hereby 


83 

what  is  evil,  and  consequently  what  is  good,  for 
by  evil  is  learnt  what  good  is,  the  quality  of 
good  being  discerned  by  its  opposite;  for  all 
perception  in  every  case  is  according  to  reflec- 
tion in  relation  to  differences  and  distinctions 
suggested  by  opposites  in  various  manners  and 
various  degrees. 

78.  The  chastising  and  instructing  spirits 
do  not  approach  those  who  call  themselves 
saints  and  lords  mediators,  concerning  whom 
see  above,  n.  70,  because  they  do  not  suffer 
themselves  to  be  instructed,  nor  are  amended 
by  discipline,  being  inflexible  in  consequence 
of  being  under  the  influence  of  self-love:  the 
chastising  and  instructing  spirits  say,  that  they 
discern  such  by  their  coldness,  and  that  when 
they  perceive  cold  they  depart  from  them. 

79.  There  are  also  spirits  amongst  those 
from  the  earth  Jupiter,  whom  they  call  sweep- 
ers of  chimnies,  because  they  appear  in  like 
garments,  and  likewise  with  sooty  faces ;  who 
they  are,  and  what  is  their  nature  and  quality, 
I  shall  also  describe.  One  of  these  spirits 
came  to  me,  and  anxiously  requested  that  I 
would  intercede  for  him  to  be  admitted  into 
heaven;  he  said,  that  he  was  not  conscious  of 
having  done  any  evil,  only  that  he  had  repri- 
manded the  inhabitants  of  his  earth,  and  that 
after  reprimanding  he  instructed  them.  He 
applied  himself  to  my  left  side  a  little  lower 


84 

• 

than  the  elbow,  and  spake  as  it  were  with  a 
divided  faith:  he  had  also  the  power  of  excit- 
ing pity;  but  all  I  could  say  in  reply  was,  that 
it  was  not  in  ray  power  to  help  him,  for  that 
all  help  was  from  the  Lord  alone ;  nor  could  I 
intercede  for  him,  because  1  did  not  know 
W'hether  it  was  useful  or  not;  but  that  if  he 
was  deserving,  he  might  have  hope.  At  that 
instant  he  was  remanded  back  amongst  some 
upright  spirhs  from  his  own  earth,  but  they 
said  that  he  could  not  be  in  consort  with  them, 
because  he  differed  in  quality  ;  still  however  he 
requested  with  an  intense  desire  to  be  let  into 
heaven,  and  in  consequence  thereof  he  was 
introduced  to  a  society  of  upright  spirits  of  this 
earth ;  but  these  also  declared  that  he  could 
not  abide  with  them  :  he  was  likewise  of  a 
black  colour  in  the  light  of  heaven,  but  he  him- 
self said  that  he  was  not  of  a  black  colour,  but 
of  a  darkish  brown.  I  was  informed  that  they 
are  such  at  first,  who  are  afterwards  received 
amongst  those  who  constitute  the  province  of 
the  SEMINAL  VESSELS  in  the  Grand  Man,  or 
heaven ;  for  in  those  vessels  the  semen  is  col- 
lected, and  is  encompassed  with  a  covering  of 
suitable  matter,  fit  to  preserve  the  prolific 
principie  of  the  semen  from  being  dissipated, 
but  which  may  be  put  off  in  the  neck  of  the 
uterus,  that  thus  what  is  reserved  within  may 
serve  for  conception  or  the  impregnation  of  the 


85 


ovulum;  hence  also  that  seminal  matter  has  a 
strong  tendency  and  as  it  were  a  burning  de- 
sire to  put  itself  off,  and  leave  the  semen  to 
accomplish  its  end.  Somewhat  similar  to  this 
appeared  likewise  in  this  spirit :  he  came  again 
to  me,  in  vile  raiment,  and  again  said  that  he 
had  a  burning  desire  to  be  admitted  into  hea- 
ven, and  that  now  he  perceived  himself  to  be 
qualified  for  that  purpose;  it  was  given  me  to 
tell  him,  that  possibly  this  was  a  token  that  he 
would  shortly  be  admitted.  At  that  instant  the 
angels  called  to  him  to  cast  off  his  raiment, 
which  he  did  immediately  with  inconceivable 
quickness  from  the  vehemence  of  his  desire; 
whereby  was  represented  what  is  the  nature  of 
their  desires,  who  are  in  the  province  to  which 
the  seminal  vessels  correspond.  I  was  inform- 
ed that  such,  when  they  are  prepared  for  hea- 
ven, are  stripped  of  their  own  garments,  and 
are  clothed  with  new  shining  raiment,  and  be- 
cotne  angels.  They  are  likened  unto  cater- 
pillars, which  having  passed  through  that  vile 
state  of  their  existence,  are  changed  into 
nymphs,  and  thus  into  butterflies,  in  which  last 
state  they  are  gifted  with  new  clothing,  and 
also  with  wings  of  various  colours,  as  blue, 
yellow,  silver,  or  golden ;  at  the  same  time 
they  have  liberty  to  fly  in  the  open  air  as  in 
their  heaven,  and  to  celebrate  their  marriages, 
and  to  lay  their  eggs,  and  thus  to  provide  for 


86 


the  propagation  of  their  kind ;  and  then  also 
sweet  and  pleasant  food  is  allotted  them  from 
the  juices  and  odours  of  various  flowers. 

80.  Hitherto  we  have  said  nothing  concern- 
ing the  natures  and  qualities  of  the  angels  who 
are  from  the  earth  Jupiter;  for  they  who  come 
to  the  men  of  their  earth,  and  sit  at  the  head, 
(concerning  whom  see  n.  73,)  are  not  angels 
in  their  interior  heaven,  but  are  angelic  spirits, 
or  angels  in  their  exterior  heaven ;  and  inas- 
much as  the  natures  and  qualities  of  the  former 
angels  have  been  made  known  to  me,  I  shall 
here  relate  what  has  been  discovered  on  that 
subject.  A  certain  spirit,  belonging  to  those  of 
the  earth  Jupiter,  who  inspire  terror,  approach- 
ed to  my  left  side  beneath  the  elbow,  and  thence 
spake  to  me,  but  his  speech  was  harsh,  nor 
were  his  expressions  very  distinct,  so  that  I 
was  obliged  to  wait  some  time  before  I  could 
collect  his  meaning;  and  whilst  he  was  speak- 
ing, he  injected  somewhat  of  terror,  admonish- 
ing me  hereby  to  give  a  kind  reception  to  the 
angels  when  they  came :  but  it  was  given  me 
to  reply,  that  this  did  not  depend  on  myself, 
for  that  all  were  received  by  me  according  to' 
what  they  were  in  themselves.  Presently  the 
angels  of  that  earth  approached,  and  it  was 
given  to  perceive  from  their  discourse  that 
they  differed  altogether  from  the  angels  of  our 
earth ;  for  they  did  not  discourse  by  verbal  ex- 


87 


pressions,  but  by  ideas  which  diffused  them- 
selves through  every  part  of  my  interiors  ;  and 
hence  also  they  had  an  influx  into  the  face,  so 
that  the  face  concurred  in  every  particular, 
beginning  from  the  lips,  and  proceeding  to- 
wards the  circumference  in  every  direction. 
The  ideas,  which  were  instead  of  verbal  ex- 
pressions, were  discrete,  but  in  a  small  degree. 
Afterwards  they  discoursed  with  me  by  ideas 
still  less  discrete,  so  tiiat  scarce  any  thing  of 
interstice  was  perceivable;  it  appeared  in  my 
perception  liiie  the  meaning  of  verbal  express- 
ions with  those,  who  attend  only  to  the  mean- 
ing abstracted  from  the  expressions;  this  dis- 
course was  more  intelligible  to  me  than  the 
former,  and  was  also  more  full ;  it  flowed  in 
like  manner  as  the  former  into  the  face;  but 
the  influx  was  more  continuous  according  to 
the  quality  of  the  discourse  ;  it  did  not  however 
begin  as  the  former  from  the  lips,  but  from  the 
eyes.  Afterwards  they  discoursed  in  a  man- 
ner still  more  continuous  and  full  ;  and  then 
the  face  could  not  concur  by  a  suitable  motion, 
but  the  influx  was  made  sensible  on  the  brain, 
which  was  acted  upon  in  like  manner.  Lastly, 
they  discoursed  so,  that  the  discoiu'se  fell  only 
on  the  interior  intellect;  its  volubility  was  like 
that  of  an  attenuated  atmosphere.  I  was  made 
sensible  of  the  influx,  but  not  distinctly  of  the 
particulars  discoursed  on.      These  several 


il 


88 


kinds  of  discourse  may  be  compared  with  dif- 
ferent fluids,  the  first  kind  with  fluent  water, 
the  second  with  water  more  attenuated,  the 
third  with  tlie  atmospherical  air,  and  the  fourth 
with  attenuated  air.  The  spirit  above  men- 
tioned, who  was  on  the  left  side,  sometimes  in- 
terrupted the  discourse,  admonisliing  me  par- 
ticularly to  behave  modestly  with  his  anzels ; 
for  there  were  attendant  spirits  from  our  earth 
who  sugsested  things  which  gave  displeasure  : 
he  said,  that  he  did  not  understand  at  first  what 
the  angels  discoursed  about,  but  that  he  did 
afterwards  when  he  removed  to  my  left  ear  ; 
then  also  his  speech  was  not  harsh  as  before, 
but  hke  that  of  other  spirits. 

81.  I  afterwards  discoursed  with  the  aneels 
concerning  some  extraordinary  particulars  on 
our  earth,  especially  concernins;  the  art  of 
printing,  concerning  the  Holy  Word,  and  con- 
cerning the  doctrinals  of  the  church  derived 
from  the  Word  :  and  I  informed  them,  that  the 
Word  and  the  doctrinals  of  the  church  were 
primed  and  pubHshed,  and  were  thus  leant ; 
they  wondered  exceedingly  that  things  of  such 
a  nature  could  be  made  public  by  writing  and 
printing. 

82.  It  was  givea  to  see  how  the  spirits  of 
that  earth,  when  they  are  prepared,  are  taken 
up  into  heaven,  and  become  angels.  On  such 
occasions  there  appear  chariots  and  bright 


89 


horses  as  of  fire,  by  which  they  are  carried 
away  in  like  manner  as  Elias.  The  reason  of 
this  appearance  of  chariots  and  bright  horses 
as  of  fire  is,  because  thus  it  is  represented  that 
they  are  instructed  and  prepared  to  enter 
])eaven,  inasmuch  as  chariots  signify  the  doc- 
trinals  of  the  church,  and  bright  horses  signify 
an  enlightened  understanding,  (ee) 

83.  The  heaven,  into  wiiich  they  are  carried 
away,  appears  on  the  right  to  their  eartli,  con- 
sequently separate  from  the  heaven  of  the  angels 
of  our  earth.  The  angels,  who  are  in  that 
heaven,  appear  clothed  in  shining  blue  raiment 
spotted  with  little  stars  of  gold,  and  this  by  rea- 
son of  their  having  loved  that  colour  in  the 
world,  and  having  believed  also  that  it  was  the 
very  essential  celestial  colour,  and  especially 


(ee)  That  chariots  signify  the  doctrinals  of  the 
church,  n.  2760,  5321,  8215.  That  horses  signi- 
fy the  intellectual  principle,  n.  2760,  2761,  2762, 
3217, 5321,  6125,  6400,  6534,  7024,  8136,  8148, 
8381.  That  the  white  horse  in  the  Revelation 
signifies  the  understanding  of  the  AVord,  n.  2760, 
That  by  Elias  in  a  representative  sense  is  meant 
the  Word,  n.  2762,  5247.  And  whereas  all 
doctrine  of  the  church  and  the  understanding 
thereof  are  from  the  Word,  Elias  is  called  the 
chariots  of  Israel  and  the  horsemen  thereof,  n. 
2762.  That  on  this  account  he  was  taken  up 
by  a  fiery  chariot  and  fiery  horses. 

18 


90 


because  they  are  principled  in  such  good  of 
love  as  that  colour  corresponds  to.'(^  ff) 

84.  Tliere  appeared  to  to  nie  a  bald  head, 
but  only  the  upper  part  thereof,  which  was 
bony ;  and  1  was  told,  that  such  an  appearance 
is  seen  by  those  who  are  to  die  within  a  year, 
and  that  they  instantly  prepare  themselves. 
The  inhabitants  of  that  earth  do  not  fear  death, 
except  on  this  account,  that  they  leave  their 
conjugal  partner,  their  children,  or  parents,  for 
they  know  that  they  shall  live  after  death,  and 
that  in  dying  they  do  not  quit  life,  because  they 
go  to  heaven  ;  wherefore  they  do  not  call  it 
dying,  but  being  heaven-made.  Such  amongst 
them  as  have  lived  in  true  conjugal  love,  and 
have  taken  such  care  of  their  children  as  be- 
comes parents,  do  not  die  of  diseases,  but  in 
tranquillity  as  in  sleep;  and  thus  they  emigrate 
from  the  world  to  heaven.  The  age  to  which 
the  inhabitrnts  live,  is,  on  an  average,  about 
thirty  years,  estimated  according  to  years  on 
our  earth.  It  is  by  the  providence  of  the  Lord 
that  they  die  at  so  early  an  age,  lest  their  num- 
bers should  increase  beyond  what  that  earth  is 
capable  of  supporting;  and  whereas,  when  they 

(ff)  That  blue  originating  in  red  or  flame-co- 
lour, corresponds  to  the  good  of  celestial  love; 
and  that  blue  grounded  in  white  or  lightish  co- 
lour, corresponds  to  the  good  of  spiritual  love, 
n.  9868. 


91 


have  fulfilled  those  years,  they  do  not  suffer 
themselves  to  be  guided  by  spirits  and  angels, 
like  those  who  are  not  so  far  advanced  in  age, 
therefore  spirits  and  angels  seldom  attend  them 
when  arrived  at  their  thirtieth  year  ;  ihey  come 
to  maturity  also  sooner  tiian  on  our  earth  ;  even 
in  the  first  flower  of  youth  they  connect  them- 
selves in  marriage,  and  then  it  is  their  chief 
delight  to  love  the  partner  of  such  connexion, 
and  to  lake  care  of  their  children  ;  other  de- 
lights they  indeed  call  delights,  but  respectively 
external. 

Concerning  the  Earth  or  Planet  Mars,  its  Spirits 
and  Inhabitants. 

85.  The  spirits  of  Mars  are  amongst  the 
best  of  all  spirits,  who  come  from  the  eartlis  of 
this  solar  system,  teing  for  llie  most  part  celes- 
tial men,  not  unlike  those  who  were  of  the  most 
ancient  church  on  this  earth,  (gtr)    When  they 

(gg)  That  the  first  and  most  ancient  church 
on  this  earth  was  a  celestial  church,  which  is  the 
chief  of  all,  concerning  which  see  n.  607,  895, 
920,  1121,  1122,  1123,  1124,  2896,  4493  8891, 
9942,  10545.  That  a  church  is  called  celestial, 
wherein  love  to  the  Lord  is  the  ruling  principle, 
but  spiritual,  wherein  the  ruling  principle  is 
charity  and  faith,  n.  3691,  6435,  9468,  9680, 
9683,  9780. 


92 


are  represented  according  lo  their  true  nature 
and  quality,  they  are  represented  with  the  face 
in  heaven,  and  the  body  in  the  world  of  spirits  ; 
and  such  of  them  as  are  angels,  are  represented 
with  the  face  towards  the  Lord,  and  with  the 
body  in  heaven. 

86.  The  planet  ]\Iars  appears  in  the  idea  of 
spirits  and  angels  (like  all  the  other  planets)  in 
its  place  constantly,  which  place  is  to  the  left  in 
front,  at  some  distance  in  the  plane  of  the  breast, 
and  thereby  out  of  the  sphere  where  the  spirits 
of  our  earth  are.  The  spirits  of  one  earth  are 
separate  froratiie  spirits  of  another  earth,  by  rea- 
son that  the  spirits  of  each  particular  earth 
have  relation  to  some  particular  province  in  the 
Grand  AlAN;(y)  and  consequently  they  are 
each  in  other  and  different  states ;  and  it  is  ow- 
ing to  this  diversity  of  state,  that  they  appear 
separate  from  each  other  either  to  the  right  or 
to  the  left,  at  a  greater  or  lesser  distance,  [hh) 

87.  Spirits  came  thence  to  me,  and  applied 
themselves  to  my  left  temple,  where  they  breath- 
ed upon  me  with  their  discourse,  but  I  did  not 
understand  it;  as  to  its  flow,  it  was  soft,  beyond 
what  1  had  ever  before  perceived,  being  like 
the  softest  breeze;  it  breathed  first  upon  the 

(hh)  That  distances  in  another  life  are  real 
appearances,  which  are  presented  visible  by  the 
Lord,  according  to  the  states  of  the  interiors  of 
angels  and  spirits,  n.  5604,  9104,  9440,  10146. 


93 


left  temple  and  upon  the  upper  part  of  the  left 
ear;  and  the  breathing  proceeded  thence  to  the 
left  eye,  and  by  degrees  to  the  right,  and  flow- 
ed down  afterwards,  especially  from  the  left 
eye,  to  the  lips;  and  wlien  it  was  at  the  lips,  it 
entered  through  the  mouth,  and  by  away  within 
the  mouth,  and  this  through  the  eustachian 
tube  into  the  brain  ;  when  the  breathing  arriv- 
ed tliither,  then  I  understood  their  speech,  and 
it  was  given  to  discourse  with  tliem.  I  ob- 
served, whilst  they  were  speaking  with  me, 
that  my  lips  were  put  in  motion,  and  also  my 
tongue  in  a  slight  degree,  and  this  by  reason 
of  the  correspondence  of  interior  speech  with 
the  exterior:  exterior  speech  is  that  of  articu- 
late soimd  conveyed  to  the  external  membrane 
of  the  ear,  and  thence  to  the  brain  by  means 
of  the  small  organs,  membranes,  and  fibres, 
which  are  within  tlie  ear.  Hence  it  was  given 
to  know,  tiiat  the  speech  of  the  inhabitants  of 
Mars  was  different  from  that  of  the  inhabitants 
of  our  earth,  in  that  it  was  not  sonorous,  but 
almost  tacit,  insinuating  itself  into  the  interior 
hearing  and  sight  by  a  shorter  way;  and  con- 
sequently, that  it  was  more  perfect,  fuller  of 
ideas,  and  thereby  approaching  nearer  to  the 
speech  of  spirits  and  angels ;  the  essential  afl^ec- 
tion  also  of  the  speech  is  represented  amongst 
them  in  the  face,  and  the  thought  thereof  in 
the  eyes ;  for  the  thought  and  the  speech,  and 
19 


94 


likewise  the  affection  and  the  face,  with  them 

act  in  unity ;  ihey  account  it  wicked  to  think 
one  thing  and  speak  another,  and  to  will  or  de- 
sire one  thing  whilst  the  features  of  the  face 
express  the  contrary ;  they  are  altogether  un- 
acquainted with  hypocrisy,  and  likewise  with 
fraudulent  pretence  and  deceit.  That  the 
same  kind  of  speech  prevailed  amongst  the 
most  ancient  people  on  our  earth,  was  given 
roe  to  know  by  conversation  with  some  of 
them  in  another  hfe ;  and  for  the  further  eluci- 
dation of  this  subject,  I  shall  here  relate  the 
following  particulars,  communicated  to  me  on 
the  occasion :  "  It  was  shewn  me  by  an  influx 
which  I  cannot  describe,  w  hat  was  the  nature 
and  quality  of  the  speech  which  prevailed 
amongst  the  men  of  the  most  ancient  church; 
that  it  was  not  articulate,  like  the  verbal  speech 
of  our  time,  but  tacit,  being  effected  not  by 
external  respiration,  but  by  internal,  thus  it 
was  speech  cogitative ;  it  was  also  given  to 
perceive  the  nature  of  their  internal  respira- 
tion, how  it  proceeded  from  the  navel  towards 
the  heart,  and  thus  through  the  lips  without  any 
thing  of  sound  whilst  they  were  speaking  ;  and 
that  it  did  not  enter  into  the  ear  of  another  by 
an  external  way,  and  beat  on  what  is  called 
the  drum  of  the  ear,  but  by  a  certain  internal 
way,  and  by  what  is  called  at  this  day,  the  tvba 
eustachiana.    It  was  further  shewn  me,  that  by 


95 


such  speech  they  were  enabled  to  express 
more  fully  tlie  purposes  of  the  mind,  and  the 
ideas  of  the  thought,  than  can  possibly  be  done 
by  articulate  sounds,  or  expressions  of  the  out- 
ward voice,  which  speech  is  in  like  manner 
directed  by  respiration,  but  such  as  is  exter- 
nal, for  there  is  not  a  single  expression,  nor 
any  constituent  of  expression,  which  is  not  di- 
rected by  applications  of  the  respiration ;  this 
however  was  effected  with  the  antediluvians 
more  perfectly,  as  being  directed  by  internal 
respiration,  which  being  of  a  more  interior  na- 
ture, is  also  more  perfect,  and  more  applica- 
ble and  conformable  to  the  ideas  of  thought. 
Moreover  they  were  enabled  to  express  their 
meaning  by  slight  motions  of  the  lips,  and  by 
corresponding  changes  of  the  countenance  ;  for 
being  celestial  men,  whatsoever  was  the  object 
of  their  thoughts  shone  forth  from  their  faces 
and  their  eyes,  which  underwent  a  conforma- 
ble variation,  the  face  as  to  its  form  according 
to  the  life  of  tlie  affection,  and  the  eyes  as  to 
light ;  it  was  not  possible  for  them  on  any  ac- 
count to  express  with  the  countenance  what 
they  did  not  think  in  their  hearts  ;  and  whereas 
their  speech  was  effected  by  internal  respira- 
tion, which  is  that  of  the  spirit  of  man,  there- 
fore they  were  enabled  to  hold  consort  and 
discourse  with  angels."  The  respiration  of 
the  spirits  of  Mars  was  also  communicated  to 


96 


me,  (u)  and  it  was  perceivable  that  their  res- 
piration proceeded  from  the  region  of  the  thorax 
towards  the  navel,  and  thence  flowed  upwards 
through  the  breast  with  an  imperceptible  breath- 
ing towards  the  mouth;  from  which  circum- 
stances it  was  manifest  to  me,  as  also  from 
other  experimental  proofs,  that  they  were  of  a 
celestial  genius,  consequently  not  unlike  those 
who  were  of  the  most  ancient  church  on  this 
earth. 

88.  I  was  instructed  that  the  spirits  of  Mars, 
in  the  Gkand  Max,  have  relation  to  the  mid- 
dle principle  between  the  intellectual  and  the 
will-principle,  consequently  that  they  have  re- 
lation to  THOUGHT  GKOUNDED  IN  AFFECTION, 

and  the  best  of  them  to  the  affection  of 
THOUGHT  :  hence  it  is  that  their  faces  act  in 
unity  with  their  thoughts,  nor  can  they  in  any 
case  play  the  hypocrite.  And  inasmuch  as 
this  is  their  relation  in  the  Grand  Man,  there- 
fore the  middle  province,  which  is  between  the 
cerebrum  and  the  cerebellum,  corresponds  to 
them :  for  where  the  cerebrum  and  the  cere- 
bellum are  joined  together  as  to  spiritual  oper- 
ations, with  such  persons  the  face  acts  in  unity 
with  the  thoughts,  so  that  the  very  affection  of 
thought  beams  forth  from  the  face,  and  the 


(ij)  That  spirits  and  angels  have  respiratioD, 
D.  3884,  3885,  3891,  3893. 


97 


general  principle  of  the  thought  beams  forth 
from  the  affection,  which  is  discoverable  also 
by  certain  signs  from  ihe  eyes:  wherefore  whilst 
the  spirits  of  Mars  were  with  me,  1  had  a  sens- 
ible perception  of  a  drawing  back  of  the  fore- 
part of  the  head  towards  the  hindpart,  conse- 
quently of  the  cerebrum  towards  the  cerebel- 
lum. (AjA;) 

89.  On  a  time,  whilst  the  spirits  of  ]Mars 
were  with  me,  and  occupied  the  sphere  of  my 
mind,  there  came  some  spirits  from  our  earlh, 
and  desired  also  to  infuse  themselves  into  that 
sphere:  but  instantly  the  spirits  of  our  earth 
became  as  it  were  insane,  by  reason  of  the 
utter  disagreement  between  them  and  the  spirits 
of  Mars;  for  the  spirits  of  our  earth,  in  the 
Grand  Mav,  have  relation  to  external  sense  ; 
hence  they  were  in  idea  turned  to  the  world 
and  to  self,  whereas  the  spirits  of  Mars  were 
in  idea  turned  from  self  to  heaven  and  their 


(kk)  That  human  faces  on  our  earth  in  an- 
cient times  received  influx  from  the  cerebellum, 
and  that  then  faces  acted  in  unity  with  men's  in- 
terior affections  ;  but  that  afterwards  they  receiv- 
ed influx  from  the  cerebrum,  when  man  began  to 
pretend  to  affections  which  were  not  his  own, 
and  to  fashion  his  countenance  falsely  according 
to  such  pretence;  concerning  the  changes  here- 
by occasioned  in  faces  in  process  of  time,  see  n. 
4325  to  4328. 

20 


98 


neighbour ;  hence  came  the  contrariety  :  but 
at  that  instant  there  approached  some  angelic 
spirits  of  Mars,  and  at  their  approach  the  com- 
munication was  closed,  and  thus  the  spirits  of 
our  earth  retired. 

90.  The  angelic  spirits  discoursed  with  me 
concerning  the  life  of  the  inhabitants  on  their 
earth,  informing  me,  that  they  are  not  under 
any  forms  of  government,  but  that  they  live 
arranged  into  greater  and  lesser  societies,  and 
that  they  are  associated  with  each  other  accord- 
ing to  their  agreement  in  mind,  which  agreement 
they  discover  instantly  by  the  face  and  speech, 
being  seldom  deceived  in  their  judgment  herein, 
and  that  then  they  are  instantly  united  in  friend- 
ship. They  informed  me  further,  that  their 
consociations  are  delightful,  and  that  they  dis- 
course with  each  other  about  what  passes  in 
their  societies,  and  especially  about  what  passes 
in  heaven,  for  several  of  them  have  manifest 
communication  with  the  angels  of  heaven. 
Such  amongst  them  as  begin  to  think  perversely 
in  their  societies,  and  thereby  to  incline  to  evil, 
are  dissociated,  and  left  to  themselves  alone,  in 
consequence  whereof  they  lead  a  most  wretch- 
ed life  out  of  all  society,  in  dens  or  other  places, 
being  no  longer  regarded  by  the  rest.  Certain 
societies  endeavour  to  compel  such  persons  to 
repentance  by  various  methods,  but  if  they  can- 
not succeed  herein,  they  separate  thenaselves 


99 


from  all  connexion  with  them.  Thus  they  are 
careful  to  provide  against  the  contagion  of  the 
lust  of  dominion  and  the  lust  of  gain,  that  is, 
against  any  persons,  under  the  influence  of  the 
lust  of  dominion,  subjecting  to  themselves  any 
society,  and  by  degrees  several  societies;  and 
against  any,  under  tlie  influence  of  the  lust  of 
gain,  depriving  otiiers  of  their  possessions. 
Every  one  on  that  earth  hves  content  with  his 
own  property, and  everyone  with  his  own  share 
of  honour,  accounting  it  enough  to  be  reputed 
upright  and  a  lover  of  his  neighbour;  this  de- 
lightful and  tranquil  principle  of  mind  would 
perish,  unless  such  as  incline  to  evil  thoughts 
and  dispositions  were  banished  from  the  rest, 
and  unless  a  prudent  but  severe  check  was 
given  to  the  first  encroachments  of  self-love  and 
the  love  of  the  world  ;  for  it  was  owing  to  these 
loves  that  empires  and  kingdoms  were  first  esta- 
blished, under  which  establishments  there  are 
few  but  what  desire  to  have  dominion,  and  to 
possess  the  property  of  others,  there  being  few 
who  do  what  is  just  and  right  out  of  a  real  love 
thereto,  and  still  fewer  who  do  good  from  area! 
principle  of  charity,  being  rather  influenced  by 
other  inotives,  such  as  the  fear  of  the  law,  and 
a  regard  to  gain,  honour,  reputation,  and  the 
like. 

91.  In  regard  to  divine  worship  as  practised 
by  the  inhabitants  of  that  earth,  they  informed 
21 


100 


me,  that  they  acknowledge  and  adore  our  Lord, 
saying,  that  he  is  the  only  God,  and  that  he 
governs  both  heaven  and  the  universe;  and  that 
every  good  thing  is  from  him,  and  that  he  leads 
and  directs  them ;  also  that  he  often  appears 
amongst  them  on  their  earth  :  it  w  as  then  given 
me  to  tell  them,  that  christians  also  on  our 
earth  know  that  the  Lord  governs  heaven  and 
earth,  agreeable  to  his  own  words  in  Matthew, 
"  All  power  is  given  to  me  in  heaven  and  in 
earth,"  xxviii.  18  ;  but  that  they  do  not  beheve 
ii  like  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  ]Mars.  They 
acquainted  me  further,  that  on  their  earth  the 
inhabitants  beheve,  that  with  themselves  there 
is  nothing  but  what  is  filthy  and  infernal,  and 
that  all  good  is  of  the  Lord;  yea  they  added 
further,  that  of  themselves  thev  are  devils,  and 
that  the  Lord  draws  them  out  of  hell,  and  con- 
tinually keeps  them  from  falling  into  it  again. 
On  a  certain  occasion,  when  the  name  of  the 
Lord  was  mentioned,  I  observed  that  those 
spirits  humbled  themselves  in  such  inward  and 
profound  abasement  as  no  words  can  describe; 
for  in  their  himiiliation  it  was  suggested  to  them, 
that  of  themselves  they  were  in  hell,  and  that 
thus  they  were  altogether  unworthy  to  look  to 
the  Lord  ,  who  is  essential  holiness ;  and  so  deep- 
ly was  this  suggestion  implanted  in  them,  being 
grounded  in  a  true  faith,  that  they  were  in  a 
measure  out  of  themselves,  and  remained  in 


101 


that  state  on  their  knees,  until  the  Lord  ele- 
vated them,  and  at  the  same  time  as  it  were 
drew  them  out  of  hell;  when  they  emerge  thus 
from  humiliation,  they  are  full  of  goodness  and 
love,  and  thereby  replenished  with  joy  of  heart. 
During  their  abasement  they  do  not  turn  their 
faces  to  the  Lord,  for  this  they  dare  not  do,  but 
turn  them  in  a  contrary  direction.  The  spirits 
who  were  about  me  said,  that  they  never  before 
were  witness  to  such  humiliation. 

92.  It  was  matter  of  surprise  to  some  spirits 
who  were  from  that  earth,  that  there  were  about 
me  so  many  spirits  from  hell,  and  that  they  also 
discoursed  with  me ;  but  it  was  given  to  reply, 
that  this  was  permitted  them,  to  the  intent  that 
I  might  know  their  natures  and  qualities,  and 
why  they  were  in  hell,  and  that  their  infernal 
state  was  in  consequence  of  and  according  to 
their  evil  lives  :  it  was  given  further  to  declare, 
that  there  were  several  amongst  them,  whom  I 
had  been  acquainted  with  during  their  abode 
in  the  world,  and  that  some  of  them  had  lived 
in  high  stations  of  dignity  and  pre-eminence, 
at  which  time  the  world  alone  had  possession 
of  their  hearts  ;  but  that  it  was  not  in  the  power 
of  any  evil  spirit,  even  the  most  infernal,  to 
hurt  me,  being  continually  under  the  Lord's 
protection. 

93.  There  was  presented  before  me  an  in- 
habitant of  that  earth ;  he  was  not  indeed  an 


102 


inhabitant,  but  like  one;  his  face  resembled  the 
faces  of  the  inhabitants  of  our  earth,  but  the 
lower  region  of  tlie  face  was  black,  not  owing 
to  his  beard,  for  he  had  none,  but  to  blackness 
instead  of  a  beard  :  this  blackness  extended 
itself  underneath  the  ears  on  both  sides;  the 
upper  part  of  the  face  was  yellowish,  like  the 
faces  of  the  inhabitants  of  our  earth  who  are 
not  perfectly  fair.  They  said,  moreover,  that 
on  that  earth  they  feed  on  the  fruits  of  trees, 
especially  on  a  kind  of  round  fruit,  which  buds 
forth  from  the  ground;  and  likewise  on  pulse; 
and  that  they  are  clothed  with  garments 
wrought  from  the  fibrous  bark  of  certain  trees, 
which  has  such  a  consistence,  that  it  may  be 
woven,  and  also  sliftened  by  a  kind  of  gum 
which  they  have  amongst  them.  They  relat- 
ed further,  that  they  are  acquainted  with  the 
art  of  making  fluid  fires,  whereby  they  have 
light  during  evening  and  night. 

94.  1  observed  on  a  time  a  sort  of  flaming 
principle  most  beautiful;  it  was  of  various  co- 
lours, as  purple  and  also  a  palish  red,  and  the 
colours  likewise  sparkled  beautifully  by  reason 
of  the  flame  :  I  saw  also  a  kind  of  hand  to 
which  that  flaming  principle  adhered,  at  first 
on  the  back  part,  afterwards  on  the  palm,  and 
thence  it  played  round  the  hand  on  all  sides: 
this  continued  for  some  time:  presently  the 
hand  with  the  flaming  principle  was  removed 


103 


at  a  distance,  and  where  it  rested  there  was  a 
bright  lucid  appearance;  in  that  bright  lucid 
appearance  the  hand  retired  from  view,  and 
instantly  the  flaming  principle  was  changed  into 
a  bird,  which  at  first  was  of  like  colours  with  the 
flaming  principle,  the  colours  sparkling  in  like 
manner,  but  they  successively  changed,  and  as 
the  colours  changed,  the  vigour  of  life  in  the 
bird  changed  also.  It  flew  all  around,  and  at 
first  about  my  head,  afterwards  in  a  direction 
in  front  into  a  kind  of  narrow  chamber,  which 
appeared  like  some  consecrated  place,  and  as 
it  flew  more  in  a  front  direction  its  life  in  pro- 
portion departed,  till  at  length  it  was  changed 
into  a  stone,  at  first  of  the  colour  of  a  pearl,  but 
afterwards  of  an  obscure  colour;  but  notwith- 
standing its  being  without  life,  it  still  continued 
flying.  During  the  flight  of  this  bird  around 
my  head,  and  whilst  it  was  still  in  the  vigour 
of  life,  there  appeared  a  spirit  from  beneath 
rising  through  the  region  of  the  loins  to  the  re- 
gion of  the  breast,  who  thence  desired  to  take 
away  the  bird ;  but  inasmuch  as  it  was  so  beau- 
tiful, he  was  prevented  by  the  spirits  around 
me,  who  all  kept  their  eyes  fixed  attentively 
upon  it:  but  the  spirit  who  rose  from  below, 
powerfully  persuaded  them  that  the  Lord  was 
with  him,  and  consequently  tliat  what  he  did 
was  from  the  Lord  ;  although  most  of  them  did 
not  beheve  this,  still  they  no  longer  hindered 


104 


him  from  taking  away  tlie  bird  :  he  was  not 
able  however  to  retain  it,  by  reason  of  an  in- 
flux from  heaven  at  that  instant,  and  therefore 
presently  let  it  fly  out  of  his  hand  at  perfect 
liberty.  When  this  had  passed,  the  spirits 
around  me,  who  had  been  exceeding  attentive 
to  the  bird  and  its  successive  changes,  began 
to  discourse  with  each  other  concerning  it,  and 
continued  their  discourse  for  a  considerable 
time :  they  had  a  perception  that  such  an  ap- 
pearance must  needs  signify  somewhat  celes- 
tial ;  they  knew  that  a  flaming  principle  signifies 
celestial  love  and  its  affections  ;  that  hand,  to 
which  the  flaming  principle  adhered,  signifies 
life  and  its  power;  that  changes  of  colour  sig- 
nify the  varieties  of  life  as  to  wisdom  and  in- 
telligence ;  that  bird  has  also  a  similar  signifi- 
cation, but  with  this  difference,  that  a  flaming 
principle  signifies  celestial  love  and  the  things 
appertaining  to  that  love,  whereas  bird  signifies 
spiritual  love  and  the  things  appertaining  to 
that  love;  (celestial  love  is  love  to  the  Lord, 
and  spiritual  love  is  charity  towards  our  neigh- 
bour;) {,scg)  and  that  the  changes  of  colours 
and  at  the  same  time  of  life  in  the  bird,  till  at 
length  it  became  a  bird  of  stone,  signify  the 
successive  changes  of  spiritual  life  as  to  intelli- 
gence. They  knew  further  that  the  spirits, 
who  ascend  from  beneath  through  the  region 
of  the  loins  to  the  region  of  the  breast,  are  in 


105 


a  principle  of  strong  persuasion  that  they  are 
in  the  Lord,  and  hence  heheve  that  whatever 
they  do,  howsoever  evil  it  may  be,  is  done  by 
them  agreeably  to  the  Lord's  will.  But 
though  they  knew  all  this,  yet  they  could  not 
hence  know  who  were  meant  by  this  appear- 
ance. At  length  they  were  instructed  from 
heaven,  that  the  inhabitants  of  Mars  were 
meant;  that  their  celestial  love,  wherein  as  yet 
several  are  principled,  was  signified  by  the 
flaming  principle  which  adhered  to  tlie  hand  ; 
and  that  the  bird  in  the  beginning,  whilst  it  was 
in  the  beauty  of  its  colours  and  in  the  vigour 
of  its  life,  signified  their  spiritual  love  ;  but  that 
by  the  bird's  becoming  as  it  were  a  bird  of 
stone  and  void  of  life,  and  at  length  of  an  ob- 
scure colour,  were  signified  such  of  the  inha- 
bitants as  had  removed  themselves  from  the 
good  of  love,  and  were  in  evil,  and  yet  still  be- 
lieve that  they  are  in  the  Lord  ;  the  like  was 
signified  by  the  spirh,  who  rose  up  and  was 
desirous  to  take  away  the  bird. 

95.  By  a  bird  of  stone  were  also  represent- 
ed the  inhabitants  of  that  earth,  who  after  a 
strange  manner  transmute  the  life  of  their 
thoughts  and  affections  into  almost  no  life,  con- 
cerning which  circumstance  I  received  the  fol- 
lowing information.  There  was  a  certain  spirit 
above  my  head,  who  discoursed  with  me,  and 
from  the  sound  of  his  voice  it  seemed  as  if  he 


106 


was  in  a  state  of  sleep ;  in  this  state  he  spake 
many  things,  and  all  with  a  prudence  equal  to 
that  of  a  person  awake :  it  was  given  to  per- 
ceive that  he  was  a  subject  by  which  the  angels 
spake,  and  he  in  that  state  perceived  and  pro- 
duced what  was  said  by  them  ;  (//)  for  he  spake 
nothing  but  what  was  true;  if  any  thing  flowed 
in  from  another  source,  he  admitted  it  indeed, 
but  did  not  bring  it  forth.  I  questioned  hira 
concerning  his  state ;  he  said  that  that  state  was 
to  him  a  peaceable  state  ;  and  that  it  was  free 
from  all  solicitude  respecting  the  future;  and 
that  at  the  same  time  he  was  fruitful  in  produc- 
ing uses,  whereby  he  had  cmmunication  with 
heaven.  I  was  told  that  such,  in  the  Grand 
Man,  have  relation  to  the  sinus  longitudinalis, 
which  lies  in  the  brain  between  the  two  hemi- 
spheres thereof,  and  is  there  in  a  quiet  state, 
howsoever  the  brain  be  disturbed  on  each  side. 
During  my  conversation  with  this  spirit,  some 
spirits  introduced  themselves  towards  the  fore- 
part of  the  head  where  he  was,  and  pressed  upon 
him,  wherefore  he  retired  to  one  side  and  gave 
them  place.  The  stranger  spirits  discoursed 
with  each  other,  but  their  discoui  se  was  unin- 

(II)  That  communications  are  effected  by 
means  of  spirits  sent  forth  from  societies  of  spirits 
and  angels  to  other  societies,  and  that  those  em- 
issary spirits  are  called  subjects,  n.  4403,  5856, 
5983,  5985,  to  5989. 


107 


telligible  both  to  myself  and  to  the  spirits  about 
me :  1  was  instructed  by  the  angels,  that  they 
were  spirits  from  the  earth  Mars,  who  had  the 
art  of  discoursing  with  each  other  in  such  a 
manner,  that  the  spirits  present  would  neither 
understand  or  perceive  what  they  said:  I  won- 
dered how  such  discourse  could  possibly  be 
contrived,  because  all  spirits  have  one  speech, 
which  flows  from  the  thinking  principle,  and 
consists  of  ideas,  which  are  heard  as  expressions 
in  the  spiritual  world  :  but  I  was  informed,  that 
tiiose  spirits  by  a  certain  method  form  ideas  ex- 
pressed by  the  lips  and  the  countenance,  unin- 
telligible to  others,  and  that  in  the  same  instant 
they  artfully  withdraw  the  thoughts,  being  parti- 
cularly cautious  lest  any  thing  of  affection  should 
manifest  itself,  because  in  such  case  the  thought 
would  appear,  inasmuch  as  thought  flows  from 
affection,  and  is  as  it  were  in  it.  I  was  further 
instructed,  that  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  Mars, 
who  make  heavenly  life  to  consist  in  knowledges 
alone,  and  not  in  a  life  of  love,  contrived  such 
jj  speech,  but  not  all;  and  that  the  contriv- 
ers thereof,  when  they  become  spirits,  retain 
the  same  kind  of  speech.  These  are  they, 
who  are  particularly  signified  by  the  bird  of 
stone;  for  to  form  a  speech  by  modifications  of 
the  countenance  and  foldings  of  the  lips,  with 
a  removal  of  the  affections,  and  a  withdrawing 
of  the  thoughts  from  others,  is  to  deprive  speech 


108 


of  its  life  and  soul,  and  to  make  it  like  a  dead 
image,  and  by  degrees  to  do  the  like  also  to 
themselves.  But  although  they  suppose  that 
their  discourse  is  not  understood  by  others, 
yet  angelic,  spirits  have  a  perception  of  all  and 
singular  the  things  which  they  discourse  about ; 
the  reason  is,  because  it  is  not  possible  for  any 
thought  to  be  withdrawn  from  angelic  spirits. 
This  was  also  proved  to  them  by  living  evi- 
dence; I  was  thinking  concerning  this  circum- 
stance, that  the  wicked  spirits  of  our  earth  are 
not  affected  with  shame  when  they  infest  oth- 
ers; this  thought  entered  into  me  by  influx 
from  some  angelic  spirits  who  had  a  perception 
of  their  discourse ;  those  spirits  of  Mars  instantly 
acknowledgeil  that  that  was  the  subject  of  their 
discourse,  and  they  were  much  surprised: 
moreover  several  things,  which  they  both  spake 
and  thought,  were  discovered  by  an  angelic 
spirit,  notwithstanding  all  their  endeavours  to 
withdraw  their  thoughts  from  him.  After- 
wards those  spirits  entered  by  influx  from 
above  into  my  face;  the  influx  felt  like  small 
striated  rain,  which  was  a  sign  that  they  were 
not  in  the  affection  of  truth  and  of  good,  for 
this  is  represented  by  what  is  striated  (^stri- 
atum) -.they  then  spake  plainly  will)  me,  saying, 
that  the  inhabitants  of  their  earth  discourse  in 
like  manner  with  each  other.  They  were 
then  told  that  this  is  evil,  because  hereby  they 


109 


obstruct  the  influence  of  things  internal,  and 
recede  from  them  to  things  external,  which 
external  tilings  also  they  deprive  of  their  pro- 
per life ;  and  particularly,  because  to  speak  in 
such  a  manner  is  not  sincere;  for  they  who  are 
sincere,  are  never  disposed  to  speak  or  even 
to  think  any  thing  but  what  others  may  know, 
not  caring  if  the  whole  world,  yea  if  the  whole 
heaven  was  acquainted  with  their  words  and 
thoughts;  but  they  who  are  odierwise  disposed, 
judge  and  think  evil  of  others,  and  well  of 
themselves,  and  at  length  are  betrayed  through 
habit  to  think  and  speak  evil  of  the  church,  of 
heaven,  yea  and  of  the  Lord  himself.  I  have 
been  informed,  that  they  who  love  knowledges, 
and  not  so  much  a  life  according  to  knowledges, 
in  the  Grand  Man  have  relation  to  the  interior 
membrane  of  the  skull;  but  that  they  who  ac- 
custom themselves  to  speak  without  affection, 
and  to  draw  the  thought  to  themselves  and 
withdraw  it  from  others,  have  relation  to  that 
membrane  when  become  bony,  because  from 
having  some  spiritual  life,  they  come  to  have 
no  life. 

96.  Inasmuch  as  by  a  bird  of  stone  are  also 
represented  those,  who  are  principled  in  know- 
ledges alone,  and  in  no  life  of  love,  and  inas- 
much as  hence  they  have  no  spiritual  life, 
therefore  by  v/ay  of  appendix  we  shall  take 
this  opportunity  of  shewing,  that  they  alone 
22 


110 


have  spiritual  life,  who  are  principled  in  celes- 
tial love,  and  thence  in  knowledges;  and  that 
each  kind  of  love  contains  in  itself  every  prin- 
ciple of  knowledge  appertaining  thereto.  This 
may  be  exemplified  by  the  case  of  all  Hving 
creatures,  whether  they  be  the  inhabitants  of 
earth,  or  of  air;  each  is  in  possession  of  the 
science  of  all  things  appertaining  to  its  particu- 
lar love,  which  love  has  respect  to  nourish- 
ment, a  safe  habitation,  the  propagation  of  their 
kind,  the  care  of  their  young,  and  with  some 
to  provide  for  themselves  during  winter ; 
wherefore  each  is  in  possession  of  all  science 
that  is  requisite,  such  science  being  implanted 
in  its  love,  and  flowing  into  each  animal  as  into 
its  proper  receptacle,  and  in  some  cases  being 
of  such  an  extraordinary  nature,  that  man  can- 
not but  be  amazed  at  it.  With  the  animals,  how- 
ever, science  is  connate,  and  is  called  instinct; 
nevertheless  it  appertains  to  the  natural  love  in 
which  they  are  principled :  and  if  man  was 
principled  in  his  proper  love,  which  is  love  to 
God  and  towards  his  neighbour,  (this  is  man's 
proper  love,  as  distinguishing  him  from  the 
beasts,  being  heavenly  love)  then  man  would 
not  only  be  principled  in  all  requisite  science, 
but  likewise  in  all  intelligence  and  wisdom,  for 
intelligence  and  wisdom  would  flow  from  hea- 
ven into  those  two  kinds  of  love,  that  is,  through 
heaven  from  the  Divine.    But  inasmuch  as 


Ill 


man  is  not  born  to  those  two  kinds  of  love,  but 
to  their  contraries,  viz.  to  self-love  and  the 
love  of  the  world,  therefore  he  must  needs  be 
born  in  all  ignorance  and  want  of  knowledge ; 
nevertheless  by  divine  means  he  is  brought  to 
somewhat  of  intelligence  and  wisdom,  but  still 
not  actually  so,  unless  the  love  of  self  and  of 
the  world  be  removed,  and  thus  a  way  be 
opened  for  love  to  God  and  towards  his  neigh- 
bour. That  love  to  God  and  neighbourly  love 
contain  in  them  all  intelligence  and  wisdom, 
may  appear  from  the  case  of  those  in  another 
life,  who,  during  their  abode  in  this  world, 
have  been  principled  in  such  love;  when  these 
after  death  are  admitted  into  heaven,  they  there 
come  into  such  knowledge  and  wisdom  as  they 
before  had  no  conception  of;  yea,  they  think 
and  speak  there,  like  the  rest  of  the  angels, 
such  things  as  ear  hath  not  heard,  neither  hath 
it  entered  into  the  heart  of  man  to  conceive, 
which  are  ineffable;  the  reason  is,  because 
those  two  kinds  of  love  have  the  faculty  of  re- 
ceiving in  themselves  such  things. 


112 


Concerning  the  Earth  or  Planet  Saturn,  its  Spirits 
and  Inhabitants, 

97.  The  spirits  from  the  earth  Saturn  ap- 
pear in  front  at  a  considerable  distance,  be- 
neath in  the  plane  of  tlie  knees,  where  the 
earth  itself  is;  and  when  the  eye  is  opened  to 
see  thither,  a  multitude  of  spirits  come  into 
view,  who  are  all  from  that  earth.  They  are 
seen  on  this  part  of  that  earth,  and  to  the  right 
of  it.  It  was  given  also  to  discourse  with  them, 
and  thereby  to  discover  their  natures  and  qual- 
ities in  respect  to  others.  They  are  upright, 
and  they  are  modest;  and  inasmuch  as  they 
esteem  themselves  little,  therefore  they  also 
appear  little  in  another  life. 

98.  In  acts  of  divine  worship  they  are  ex- 
ceedingly humble,  for  on  such  occasions  they 
account  themselves  as  nothing.  They  worship 
our  Lord,  and  acknowledge  him  as  the  only 
God.  The  Lord  also  appears  to  them  at  times 
under  an  angelic  form,  and  thereby  as  a  man, 
and  at  such  times  the  Divine  beams  forth  from 
the  face  and  affects  the  mind.  The  inhabit- 
ants also,  when  they  arrive  at  a  certain  age, 
discourse  with  spirits,  by  whom  they  are  in- 
structed concerning  the  Lord,  how  he  ought 
to  be  worshipped,  and  likewise  how  they  ought 
to  live.    When  any  attempt  is  made  to  seduce 


113 


the  spirits  who  come  from  the  earth  Saturn, 
and  to  withdraw  them  from  faith  in  the  Lord, 
or  from  humihation  towards  him,  and  from  up- 
rightness of  life,  they  say  that  they  would 
rather  die ;  on  such  occasions  there  appear  in 
their  hands  little  knives,  with  which  they  seem 
desirous  to  strike  their  bosoms ;  on  being  ques- 
tioned why  they  do  so,  they  say,  that  they 
would  rather  die  than  be  drawn  aside  from  the 
Lord.  The  spirits  of  our  earth  sometimes  de- 
ride them  on  this  account,  and  infest  them  with 
reproaches;  but  their  reply  is,  that  they  are 
well  aware  they  do  not  kill  themselves,  and 
that  this  is  only  an  appearance  flowing  from 
their  will-principle,  inclining  them  rather  to 
die  than  to  be  withdrawn  from  the  worship  of 
the  Lord. 

99.  They  said,  that  sometimes  spirits  from 
our  earth  come  to  them,  and  ask  them  what 
God  they  worship?  and  that  the  answer  they 
give  them,  is,  that  they  are  out  of  their  senses, 
and  that  there  cannot  be  a  greater  proof  of  in- 
sanity than  to  ask  what  God  any  one  worships, 
when  there  is  but  one  only  God  for  all  in  the 
universe  to  worship ;  and  that  they  are  still 
more  beside  themselves  in  this,  that  they  do 
not  acknowledge  the  Lord  to  be  that  one  only 
God,  and  that  he  rules  the  universal  heaven, 
and  thereby  the  universal  world ;  for  whoso- 
ever rules  heaven  rules  also  the  world,  inasmuch 
23 


114 


as  the  world  is  ruled  by  and  through  heaven. 

100.  They  said,  that  on  their  earth  there 
are  also  some,  who  call  the  nocturnal  light, 
which  is  great,  the  Lord,  but  that  they  are  se- 
parated from  the  rest,  and  are  not  tolerated  by 
them.  That  nocturnal  light  comes  from  the 
great  belt,  which  at  a  distance  encompasses 
that  earth,  and  from  the  moons  which  are  called 
Saturn's  satellites. 

101.  They  related  further,  that  another 
kind  of  spirits,  who  go  in  companies,  frequently 
come  to  them,  desiring  to  know  all  particulars 
relative  to  their  circumstances,  and  that  by  va- 
rious methods  they  extract  from  them  whatever 
they  know;  they  observed  concerning  these 
spirits,  that  they  were  not  beside  themselves, 
only  in  this,  that  they  desire  to  know  so  much 
for  no  other  intent  than  to  possess  knowledge. 
They  were  afterwards  instructed  that  these 
spirits  were  from  the  planet  Mercury  or  the 
earth  nearest  the  sun,  and  that  they  are  de- 
lighted with  knowledges  alone,  and  not  so 
much  with  the  uses  thence  derived. 

102.  The  inhabitants  and  spirits  of  the 
planet  Saturn  have  relation,  in  the  Grand  Man, 

to  the  MIDDLE  SENSE  BETWEEN  THE  SPIRIT- 
UAL AND  THE  NATURAL  MAN,  but  tO  that  which 

recedes  from  the  natural  and  accedes  to  the 
spiritual :  hence  it  is  that  those  spirits  appear  to 
be  carried  or  snatched  away  into  heaven,  and 


115 


presently  to  be  let  back  again ;  for  whatever 
appertains  to  spiritual  sense  is  in  heaven,  but 
whatever  appertains  to  natural  sense  is  bencatli 
heaven.  Inasmuch  as  the  spirits  of  our  earth, 
in  the  Grand  jMan,  have  relation  to  natural  and 
corporeal  sense,  it  was  given  to  know  by  man- 
ifest experience  how  the  spiritual  man  and  the 
natural  fight  and  strive  Avith  each  other,  when 
the  latter  is  not  principled  in  faith  and  charity. 
The  spirits  of  the  earth  Saturn  came  from  afar 
into  view,  and  instantly  there  was  opened  a 
living  communication  between  them  and  such 
i  spirits  of  our  earth  as  were  not  principled  in 
1  faith  and  charity ;  the  latter,  on  thus  perceiving 
;  the  former,  became  like  persons  insane,  and 
began  to  infest  them,  by  infusing  unworthy 
suggestions  concerning  faith,  and  also  concern- 
ing the  Lord ;  and  whilst  they  were  busied  in 
these  invectives  and  abuses,  they  also  cast 
themselves  into  the  midst  of  them,  and  in  the 
spirit  of  insanity  by  which  they  were  possessed, 
endeavoured  to  do  them  mischief;  but  the 
\  spirits  of  Saturn  were  not  at  all  afraid,  becanse 
they  were  secure  and  in  tranquillity ;  whereas 
the  spirits  of  our  earth,  when  they  were  in  the 
midst  of  them,  began  to  be  tortured,  and  to 
respire  with  difficulty,  and  in  consequence 
thereof  made  their  escape  with  all  precipitation, 
one  this  way  and  another  that,  till  they  all  dis- 
appeared. The  s])irits  who  were  present  per- 
24 


116 


ceived  from  this  circumstance,  what  is  the 
nature  and  qualit}^  of  the  natural  man  when 
separate  from  the  spiritual,  and  w  hen  he  comes 
into  a  spiritual  sphere,  viz.  that  he  is  insane  ; 
for  the  natural  man  separate  from  the  spiritual 
is  wise  only  with  a  w  isdom  that  originates  in 
the  world,  and  not  with  the  wisdom  that  is  from 
heaven;  and  he  who  is  wise  only  with  the  wis- 
dom that  originates  in  the  world,  believes  no- 
thing but  what  he  can  apprehend  with  his 
senses,  and  the  things  which  he  believes  are 
grounded  in  the  fallacies  of  the  senses,  which, 
unless  they  are  removed  by  an  influx  from  the 
spiritual  world,  produce  false  principles  and 
persuasions  :  hence  it  is  that  spiritual  things  are 
things  of  nought  to  such  persons,  insomuch 
that  they  can  scarce  bear  to  hear  mention  made 
of  any  thing  spiritual ;  wherefore  they  become 
insane  when  they  are  kept  in  a  spiritual  sphere. 
It  is  otherwise  during  their  abode  in  the  world, 
where  they  either  think  naturally  concerning 
spiritual  things,  or  avert  their  ears  that  they 
may  not  hear  them,  that  is,  they  hear  and  do 
not  attend.  It  was  also  manifest  from  this  ex- 
perimental evidence,  that  the  natural  man  can- 
not introduce  itself  into  the  spiritual,  that  is, 
ascend;  but  when  man  is  principled  in  faith, 
and  thereby  in  spiritual  life,  in  this  case  the 
spiritual  man  flow-s  into  the  natural,  and  thinks 
therein ;  for  there  is  given  a  spiritual  influx, 


117 


that  is,  an  influx  from  the  spiritual  world  into 
the  natural,  but  not  vice  versa,  or  from  the  na- 
tural into  the  spiritual,  (mm) 

103.  I  was  further  informed  by  the  spirits 
of  that  earth  respecting  the  consociations  of 
the  inhabitants,  with  several  other  particulars. 
They  said,  that  they  lived  divided  into  families, 
every  family  apart  by  itself;  each  family  con- 
sisting of  a  man  and  his  wife  with  their  child- 
ren; and  that  the  children,  when  they  enter  on 
a  married  state,  are  separated  from  the  house, 
and  have  no  further  care  about  it;  wherefore 
the  spirits  from  that  earth  appear  two  and  two : 
that  they  are  little  solicitous  about  food  and 
raiment ;  that  they  feed  on  the  fruits  and  pulse 
which  their  earth  produces,  and  that  they  are 
clothed  slightly,  being  encompassed  with  a 
coarse  skin  or  coat,  which  repels  the  cold : 
moreover,  that  all  on  that  earth  know  that  they 
shall  live  after  death ;  and  that  on  this  account 
also  they  make  light  of  their  bodies,  only  so 
far  as  regards  that  life,  which  they  say  is  to 
remain  and  serve  the  Lord ;  it  is  for  this  reason 

(mm)  That  influx  is  spiritual,  and  not  physi- 
cal or  natural,  consequently  that  influx  is  from 
the  spiritual  world  into  the  natural,  and  not 
from  the  natural  into  the  spiritual,  n.  3214,  5119, 
5259,  5427,  5428,  5477,  6322.  That  it  appears 
as  if  influx  is  from  externals  into  man's  internals, 
but  this  is  a  fallacy,  n.  3721. 


118 


likewise  they  do  not  bury  the  bodies  of  the 
dead,  but  cast  them  forth,  and  cover  them  vvhh 
branches  of  forest  trees. 

104.  Being  questioned  concerning  that  great 
belt,  which  appears  from  our  earth  to  rise 
above  the  horizon  of  that  planet,  and  to  vary  its 
situations,  they  said,  that  it  does  not  appear  to 
them  as  a  belt,  but  only  as  somewhat  whitish, 
Hke  snow  in  the  heaven  in  various  directions. 


Concerning  the  Earth  or  Planet  Venus,  its  Spir- 
its and  Inhabitants. 

105.  The  planet  Venus,  in  the  idea  of  spir- 
its and  angels,  appears  to  the  left  a  little  back- 
wards, at  some  distance  from  our  earth.  It 
is  said,  "  in  the  idea  of  spirits,"  because  nei- 
ther the  sun  of  this  world,  nor  any  planet,  ap- 
pears to  any  spirit,  but  spirits  have  only  an  idea 
that  they  exist ;  it  is  in  consequence  of  such 
idea  that  the  sun  of  this  world  is  presented  be- 
hind as  somewhat  darkish,  and  the  planets  not 
moveable  as  in  the  world,  but  remaining  con- 
stantly in  their  several  places,  see  above,  n.  42. 

106.  In  the  planet  Venus  there  are  two 
kinds  of  men,  of  tempers  and  dispositions  op- 
posite to  each  other ;  the  first  mild  and  humane, 
the  second  savage  and  almost  brutal ;  they  who 
are  mild  and  humane  appear  on  the  further 


119 


side  of  the  earth,  they  who  are  savage  and  al- 
most brutal  appear  on  the  side  looking  this  way. 
But  it  is  to  be  observed,  that  they  appear  thus 
according  to  the  states  of  their  Ufe,  for  in  the 
spiritual  world  the  state  of  life  determines  every 
appearance  of  space  and  of  distance. 

107.  Some  of  those  who  appear  on  the  fur- 
ther side  of  the  planet,  and  who  are  mild  and 
humane,  came  to  me,  and  were  presented  visi- 
bly above  my  head,  and  discoursed  with  me 
on  various  subjects ;  amongst  other  particulars 
they  said,  that  during  their  abode  in  the  world, 
and  more  so  since  they  were  become  spirits, 
they  acknowledged  our  Lord  as  their  only 
God  ;  they  added,  that  on  their  earth  they  had 
seen  him,  and  they  represented  also  how  they 
had  seen  him.  These  spirits  in  the  Grand 
Man  have  relation  to  the  memory  of  things  ma- 
terial agreeing  with  the  memory  of  things  im- 
material, to  which  the  spirits  of  Mercury  have 
relation :  wherefore  the  spirits  of  Mercury 
have  the  fullest  agreement  with  these  spirits  of 
Venus,  and  on  this  account,  when  they  were 
together,  a  remarkable  change,  and  a  power- 
ful operation  in  my  brain,  was  perceivable  from 
their  influx,  see  above,  n.  43. 

108.  I  did  not  however  discourse  with  those 
spirits  who  were  on  the  side  that  looks  this 
way,  and  who  are  savage  and  almost  brutal, 
but  I  was  informed  by  the  angels  concerning 


120 


their  nature  and  quality,  and  whence  it  comes 
that  they  are  so  brutal ;  the  cause  is  this,  that 
they  are  exceedingly  delighted  with  rapine, 
and  more  especially  with  eating  of  their  booty : 
the  delight  thence  arising,  when  they  think 
about  eating  of  their  booty,  was  communicated 
to  me,  and  was  perceived  to  be  most  extraor- 
dinary. That  on  this  earth  there  have  been 
inhabitants  of  a  like  brutal  nature,  appears  from 
the  histories  of  various  nations;  also  from  the 
inhabitants  of  the  land  of  Canaan,  i  Sam.  xxx. 
16;  and  likewise  from  the  Jewish  and  Israelit- 
ish  nation,  even  in  the  time  of  David,  in  that 
they  made  yearly  excursions,  and  plundered 
the  Gentiles,  and  rejoiced  in  feasting  on  the 
spoils.  I  was  informed  further,  that  those  in- 
habitants are  for  the  most  part  giants,  and  that 
the  men  of  our  earth  reach  only  to  their  navels : 
also  that  they  are  stupid,  making  no  inquiries 
concerning  heaven  or  eternal  life,  but  immers- 
ed solely  in  earthly  cares,  and  the  care  of  their 
cattle. 

109.  In  consequence  of  this  their  nature 
and  quality,  when  they  come  into  another  life, 
they  are  exceedingly  infested  there  by  evils 
and  false  persuasions.  The  hells,  which  ap- 
pertain to  them,  appear  near  their  earth,  and 
have  no  communication  with  the  hells  of  the 
wicked  of  our  earth,  by  reason  of  their  differ- 
ent tempers  and  dispositions ;  hence  also  their 


121 


evils  and  false  persuasions  are  totally  of  a  dif- 
ferent sort. 

110.  Such  however  amongst  them,  as  are 
in  a  capacity  of  being  saved,  are  in  places  of 
vastation,  and  are  there  reduced  to  the  last  state 
of  desperation ;  for  there  is  no  other  method 
whereby  evils  and  false  persuasions  of  that  kind 
can  be  subdued  and  removed.  When  they  are 
in  a  state  of  desperation,  they  cry  out  that  they 
are  beasts,  that  they  are  abominations,  that 
they  are  hatreds,  and  that  thqreby  they  are 
damned.  Some  of  them,  when  they  are  in 
this  state,  exclaim  even  against  heaven,  but  as 
this  proceeds  from  desperation,  it  is  forgiven 
them ;  the  Lord  moderates  on  these  occasions, 
and  restrains  within  proper  limits  their  harsh 
and  bitter  expressions.  These,  when  they  have 
passed  through  extreme  suffering,  are  finally 
saved,  inasmuch  as  the  corporeal  principles 
are  hereby  brought  to  a  kind  of  death.  It  was 
further  declared  concerning  these  spirits,  that 
during  their  life  on  their  earth,  they  beheved  in 
some  great  Creator  without  a  Mediator,  but  when 
they  are  saved,  they  are  also  instructed  that  the 
Lord  alone  is  God,  the  Saviour  and  Mediator. 
I  have  seen  some  of  them,  after  they  have 
passed  through  extreme  suffering,  taken  up  into 
heaven,  and  when  they  were  received  there, 
I  have  been  made  sensible  of  such  a  tender- 
ness of  joy  from  them,  as  drew  tears  from  ray 
eyes. 


122 


Concerning  the  Spirits  and  Inhabitants  of  the  Moon. 

111.  Certain  spirits  appeared  over  my 
head,  and  thence  were  heard  voices  hke  thun- 
der, for  the  thunder  of  their  voices  exactly  re- 
sembled the  sound  of  thunder  from  the  clouds 
after  lightning.  I  at  first  conjectured,  that  it 
was  owing  to  a  great  multitude  of  spirits,  who 
had  the  art  of  uttering  voices  attended  with  so 
loud  a  noise.  .  The  more  simple  spirits,  who 
were  with  me,  smiled  on  the  occasion,  at  which 
I  was  much  surprised ;  but  the  cause  of  their 
smiling  was  presently  discovered  to  be  this, 
that  the  spirits,  who  thundered,  were  not  many, 
but  few,  and  were  also  as  httle  as  children; 
and  that  on  former  occasions  they  had  terrified 
them  by  such  noises,  and  yet  were  unable  to 
do  them  any  hurt.  In  order  that  I  might  know 
their  nature  and  quality,  some  of  them  de- 
scended from  on  high  where  they  were  thun- 
dering, and  what  surprised  me,  one  carried 
another  on  his  back,  and  thus  two  of  them  ap- 
proached me.  Their  faces  appeared  not  un- 
handsome, but  longer  than  the  faces  of  other 
spirits ;  in  regard  to  stature,  they  appeared  like 
children  of  seven  years  old,  but  more  robust; 
thus  they  were  dwarfs  (homunciones).  It  was 
told  me  by  the  angels,  that  they  were  from  the 
Moon.  He  who  was  carried  on  the  other's 
back,  on  coming  to  me,  applied  himself  to  my 


123 


left  side  under  the  elbow,  and  thence  discoursed 
with  me,  saying,  that  whenever  they  utter  their 
voices  they  thus  thunder;  and  that  thereby 
they  terrify  the  spirits  who  are  inclined  to  do 
ihem  mischief,  and  put  some  to  flight,  and  that 
thus  they  go  with  security  whithersoever  they 
are  disposed.  To  convince  me  that  the  noise 
they  make  was  of  such  a  sort,  he  retired  from 
me  to  some  other  spirits,  but  not  entirely  out 
of  sight,  and  thundered  in  like  manner.  They 
shewed  moreover,  that  the  voice  being  uttered 
from  the  abdomen,  like  an  eructation,  made 
this  thundering  sound.  It  was  perceived  that 
this  was  owing  to  this  particular  circumstance, 
that  the  inhabitants  of  the  Moon  do  not  speak 
from  the  lungs,  like  the  inhabitants  of  other 
earths,  but  from  the  abdomen,  and  thus  from  a 
certain  quantity  of  air  there  collected,  by  rea- 
son that  the  Moon  is  not  encompassed  with  an 
atmosphere  like  that  of  other  earths.  I  was 
instructed,  that  the  spirits  of  the  Moon,  in  the 
Grand  Man,  have  relation  to  the  ensiform 
cartilage  or  xiphoides,  to  which  the  ribs  in  front 
are  joined,  and  from  which  descends  the  fascia 
alba,  which  is  the  fulcrum  of  the  abdominal 
muscles. 

112.  That  there  are  inhabitants  in  the  Moon, 
is  well  known  to  spirits  and  angels,  and  in  like 
manner  that  there  are  inhabitants  in  the  moons 
or  satellites  which  revolve  about  Jupiter  and 


124 


Saturn.  They  who  have  not  seen  and  dis- 
coursed with  spirits  coming  from  those  moons, 
still  entertain  no  doubt  but  there  are  men  in- 
habiting them,  because  they  are  earths  alike 
with  the  planets,  and  wherever  an  earth  is, 
there  are  men  inhabitants ;  for  man  is  the  end 
for  which  every  earth  was  created,  and  nothing 
was  made  by  the  great  Creator  without  an 
end.  That  the  human  race,  as  constituent  of 
heaven,  is  the.end  of  creation,  may  appear  to 
every  one  who  thinks  from  a  rational  principle 
at  all  enlightened. 


The  Reasons  why  the  Lord  was  willing  to  he  horn 
on  our  Earthy  and  not  on  another. 

113.  There  are  several  reasons,  concern- 
ing which  I  had  information  from  heaven,  why 
it  pleased  the  Lord  to  be  born,  and  to  assume 
a  humanity  on  our  earth,  and  not  on  another. 
The  PRINCIPAL  REASON  wus  hccause  of  the 
Word,  in  that  it  might  he  written  on  our  earth  ; 
and  u'hen  written  be  afterwards  published 
throughout  the  whole  earth;  and  when  once 
published  be  preserved  to  all  posterity;  and 
that  thus  it  might  be  made  manifest,  eveyi  to  all 
in  another  life,  that  God  teas  made  Man. 

1 14.  That  the  principal  reason  was  because 
of  the  Word,  is  in  consequence  of  the  Word 


125 


being  essential  divine  trnlli,  which  teaches  man 
that  there  is  a  God,  that  there 'is  a  heaven  and 
a  hell,  and  that  there  is  a  life  after  death ;  and 
teaches  moreover  how  man  ought  to  live  and 
beheve,  in  order  to  his  admission  into  heaven, 
and  thereby  to  eternal  happiness.  All  these 
things  would  have  been  altogether  unknown 
without  a  revelation,  consequently  on  this  earth 
without  the  Word,  and  yet  man  is  so  created, 
that  as  to  his  interiors  he  cannot  die.  (?m) 

115.  That  the  Word  might  be  ivritten  on 
our  earth,  is  in  consequence  of  the  art  of  writing 
having  existed  here  from  the  most  ancient  time, 
first  on  the  rind  or  bark  of  trees,  next  on  skins 
or  parchment,  afterwards  on  paper,  and  lastly 
by  types  as  in  printing.  This  was  provided 
of  the  Lord  for  the  sake  of  the  Word. 


(n«)  That  by  mere  natural  light  nothing  can 
be  known  concerning  the  Lord,  concerning  hea- 
ven and  bell,  concerning  the  life  of  man  after 
death,  and  concerning  divine  truths,  by  which 
man  has  spiritual  and  eternal  life,  n.  8944, 
10318,  10319,  10320.  That  this  may  appear 
from  this  consideration,  that  several,  and  amongst 
them  the  learned,  do  not  believe  those  things, 
although  they  are  born  where  the  Word  is,  and 
where  there  is  instruction  by  the  Word  concern- 
ing those  things,  n.  10319.  That  therefore  it 
was  necessary  there  should  lie  a  revelation  from 
heaven,  because  man  was  born  for  heaven,  u.  1 775. 


126 


116.  That  the  Word  might  afterwards  he 
published  throughout  this  ivhole  earth,  is  in 
consequence  of  the  communication  opened  here 
amongst  all  nations,  both  by  land  and  water, 
to  all  parts  of  the  globe;  hence  the  Word  once 
written  might  be  conveyed  from  one  nation  to 
another,  and  be  taught  in  all  places. 

117.  That  the  JVord  once  written  might  be 
preserved  to  all  posterity,  consequently  for 
thousands  and  thousands  of  years,  and  that  it 
has  been  so  preserved,  is  well  known. 

118.  That  thus  it  might  be  made  manifest 
that  God  ivas  made  Man  ;  for  it  was  with  a 
view  to  this  chief  and  most  essential  object  that 
the  Word  was  revealed,  inasmuch  as  no  one 
can  believe  in  a  God,  and  love  a  God,  whom 
he  cannot  comprehend  under  some  appear- 
ance ;  wherefore  they  who  acknowledge  an 
invisible  and  thus  incomprehensible  princij^le, 
in  thought  sink  into  nature,  and  consequently 
believe  in  no  God  :  wherefore  it  pleased  the 
Lord  to  be  born  on  this  earth,  and  to  make  this 
manifest  by  the  Word,  that  it  might  not  only 
be  known  on  this  globe,  but  that  also  it  might 
be  made  manifest  thereby  to  spirits  and  angels 
even  from,  other  earths,  and  likewise  to  the 
Gentiles  from  our  earth. (oo) 


(go)  That  the  Gentiles  in  another  life  are  in- 
striicted  by  angels,  and  that  they,  who  have  liv*^-' 


127 


119.  Il  is  to  be  observed,  that  the  Word  on 
our  earth  given  through  heaven  from  the  Lord 
is  the  union  of  heaven  and  tlie  world ;  for  which 
end  there  is  a  correspondence  of  all  things 
contained  in  the  letter  of  the  Word  with  divine 
things  in  heaven;  and  the  Word  in  its  supreme 
and  inmost  sense  treats  of  the  Lord,  of  his 
kingdom  in  the  heavens  and  the  earths,  and  of 
love  and  faith  from  him  and  in  him,  conse- 
quently of  life  from  him  and  in  him  ;  such 
things  are  presented  to  the  angels  in  heaven, 
when  the  Word  of  our  earth  is  read  and 
preached,  [pp) 

120.  In  every  other  earth  divine  truth  is 
manifested  by  word  of  mouth  by  spirits  and 
angels,  as  was  said  above  in  speaking  of  the 

good  lives  according  to  their  religious  principles, 
receive  the  truths  of  faith,  and  acknowledge  the 
Lord,  n.  2049,  2595,  2598,  2600,  2601,  2603, 
2661,  2863,  3263. 

(pp)  That  the  Word  is  understood  by  the  an- 
gels in  the  heavens  after  a  different  manner  from 
what  it  is  understood  by  men  on  the  earths,  and 
that  the  internal  or  spiritual  sense  is  for  the  an- 
gels, but  the  externa!  or  natural  sense  for  men, 
n.  1769  to  1772,  1887,  2143,  23-33,  2396,  2540, 
2541,  2545,  2551.  That  theAVord  is  conjunctive 
of  heaven  and  earth,  n.  2310,  2495,  9212,  9215, 
9357,  10357.  That  the  Word  therefore  was 
written  by  mere  correspondences,  n.  1404, 1408, 


12S 


inhabitants  of  the  earths  in  this  solar  system, 
but  this  manifestation  is  confined  to  famiUcs : 
for  mankind  in  most  earths  live  distinct  accord- 
ing to  families ;  wherefore  divine  truth  thus  re- 
vealed by  spirits  and  angels  is  not  conveyed 
far  beyond  the  limits  of  families,  and  unless  a 
new  revelation  constantly  succeeds,  truth  is 
either  perverted  or  perishes.  It  is  otherwise 
on  our  earth,  where  divine  truth,  which  is  the 
Word,  remains  forever  in  its  integrity. 

121.  It  is  to  be  observed,  that  the  Lord  ac- 
knowledges and  receives  all,  of  whatsoever 
earth  they  be,  who  acknowledge  and  worship 
God  under  a  human  form,  inasmuch  as  God  un- 
der a  human  form  is  the  Lord.  And  whereas 
the  Lord  appears  to  the  inhabitants  in  the  earths 
in  an  angelic  form,  which  is  a  human  form,  there- 
fore when  the  spirits  and  angels  from  those 
earths  are  informed  by  the  spirits  and  angels 
of  our  earth  that  God  is  actually  Man,  they 
receive  that  Word,  acknowledge  it,  and  rejoice 
that  it  is  so. 

122.  To  the  reasons  above  adduced  may 
be  added,  that  the  inhabitants  and  spirits  of 
our  earth,  in  the  Grand  Man,  have  relation 


1409, 1540, 1619, 1659, 1709, 1783,  8615, 10687. 
That  in  the  inmost  sense  of  the  Word,  the  Lord 
alone  and  his  kingdom  are  treated  of,  u.  1S73, 
2249,  2523,  7014,  9357. 


129 

to  natural  and  external  sense,  which  sense  is 
the  ultimate  wherein  the  interiors  of  life  close, 
and  rest  as  in  their  common  basis.  The  case 
is  similar  in  regard  to  divine  truth  in  the  letter, 
which  is  called  the  Word,  and  which  for  this 
reason  also  was  given  on  this  earth,  and  not 
on  any  other,  [qq)  And  whereas  the  Lord  is 
the  Word,  and  is  the  first  and  the  last  thereof, 
therefore,  that  all  things  might  exist  according 
to  order,  he  was  willing  to  be  born  on  this 
earth,  and  be  made  the  Word,  according  to 
what  is  written  in  John,  "  In  the  beginning  was 
the  Word,  and  the  Word  was  with  God,  and 
God  was  the  Word ;  this  was  in  the  beginning 
with  God :  all  things  were  made  by  him,  and 
without  him  was  not  any  thing  made  which 
was  made :  and  the  Word  was  made  Flesh, 
and  dwelt  amongst  us,  and  we  beheld  his  glory, 
the  glory  as  of  the  only-begotten  of  the  Father. 
No  one  hath  seen  God  at  any  time ;  tlie  only- 
begotten  Son,  who  is  in  the  bosom  of  the  Father, 
he  hath  exposed  him  to  view,"  i.  1,2,  3,4, 14, 

(qq)  That  the  AVord  in  the  sense  of  the  letter 
is  natural,  n.  8783.  By  reason  that  what  is  na- 
tural is  the  ultimate,  wherein  spiritual  and  celes- 
tial things  close,  and  on  which  they  subsist  as  on 
their  foundation,  and  that  otherwise  the  internal 
or  spiritual  sense  of  the  Word  would  be  as  a 
house  without  a  foundation,  u.  9430,  9133,  9824, 
10044, 10436. 

26 


130 


IS.  The  Word  is  the  Lord  as  to  divine  truth, 
consequently  divine  truth  from  the  Lord,  (rr) 
But  this  is  an  arcanum  which  will  be  intelligi- 
ble only  to  very  few. 


Concerning  the  Earths  in  the  Starry  Heaven. 

123.  They  who  are  in  heaven  can  discourse 
and  converse  with  angels  and  spirits,  who  are 
not  only  from  the  earths  in  this  solar  system, 
but  also  from  other  earths  in  the  universe  out 
of  this  system ;  and  not  only  with  the  spirits 
and  angels  there,  but  also  with  the  inhabitants 
themselves,  only  however  with  those  whose  in- 
teriors are  open,  so  that  they  can  hear  such  as 
speak  from  heaven.  The  same  is  the  case 
with  man,  during  his  abode  in  the  world,  to 
whom  it  has  been  given  of  the  Lord  to  dis- 
course with  spirits  and  angels;  for  man  is  a 
spirit  as  to  his  interiors,  the  body  which  he 
carries  about  in  the  world  only  serving  him  for 
the  performing  functions  in  tiiis  natural  or  ter- 
restrial sphere,  which  is  the  ultimate  of  all 
spheres.    But  it  is  given  to  no  one  to  discourse 

(rr)  That  the  Word  is  the  Lord  as  to  divine 
truth,  consequently  divine  truth  from  the  Lord, 
n.  2859,  4692,  5075,  9987.  That  by  divine 
truth  all  things  were  created  and  made,  n.  2S03, 
2884,  5272,  7835. 


131 


as  a  spirit  with  angels  and  spirits,  unless  he  be 
such,  that  he  can  consociate  with  angels  as  to 
faith  and  love  ;  nor  can  he  so  consociate,  unless 
he  have  faith  and  love  to  the  Lord,  for  man  is 
joined  to  the  Lord  by  faith  and  love  to  him, 
that  is,  by  truths  of  doctrine  and  good  princi- 
ples of  life  derived  from  him ;  and  when  he  is 
joined  to  the  Lord,  he  is  secure  from  the  as- 
saults of  evil  spirits  from  hell.  With  others 
the  interiors  cannot  be  so  far  opened,  since  they 
are  not  in  the  Lord.  This  is  the  reason  why 
there  are  few  at  this  day,  to  whom  it  is  given 
to  speak  and  converse  with  angels ;  a  manifest 
proof  whereof  is,  that  the  existence  of  spirits 
and  angels  is  scarce  believed  at  this  day,  much 
less  that  they  are  attendant  on  every  man,  and 
that  by  them  man  has  connexion  with  heaven, 
and  by  heaven  with  the  Lord;  still  less  is  it 
believed,  that  man,  when  he  dies  as  to  the 
body,  lives  a  spirit,  even  in  a  human  form  as 
before. 

124.  Inasmuch  as  there  are  many  at  this 
day  in  the  church,  who  have  no  faith  concern- 
ing a  life  after  death,  and  scarce  any  concern- 
ing heaven,  or  concerning  the  Lord  as  being 
the  God  of  heaven  and  earth,  therefore  the  in- 
teriors appertaining  to  my  spirit  are  open  by 
the  Lord,  so  that  I  am  enabled,  during  my 
abode  in  the  body,  to  have  commerce  with  the 
angels  in  heaven,  and  not  only  to  discourse 


132 


with  them,  but  also  to  see  the  astonishing  things 
of  their  kingdom,  and  to  describe  the  same,  in 
order  to  clieck  from  henceforth  the  cavils  of 
those  who  urge,  "Did  ever  any  one  come  from 
heaven  and  assure  us  that  such  a  place  exists, 
and  acquaint  us  with  what  is  doing  there  ?" 
Nevertheless  I  am  aware,  that  they  who  in 
heart  have  heretofore  denied  a  heaven  and  a 
hell,  and  a  life  after  death,  will  even  still  con- 
tinue in  the  obstinacy  of  unbelief  and  denial; 
for  it  is  easier  to  make  a  raven  white,  than  to 
make  those  beHeve,  who  have  once  in  heart 
rejected  faith;  the  reason  is,  because  such  per- 
sons always  think  about  matters  of  faith  from 
a  negative  principle,  and  not  from  an  affirma- 
tive. May  the  things  however,  which  have 
been  hitherto  declared,  and  which  we  have 
further  to  declare,  concerning  angels  and  spir- 
its, be  for  the  use  of  those  few  who  are  princi- 
pled in  faith!  whilst  it  is  permitted,  in  order 
to  bring  others  to  somewhat  of  acknowledg- 
ment, to  relate  such  particulars,  as  delight  and 
engage  the  attention  of  persons  desirous  of 
knowledge;  for  which  purpose  we  shall  now 
proceed  to  give  an  account  of  the  earths  in  the 
Starry  Heaven. 

125.  He  who  is  unacquainted  with  the  arcana 
of  heaven,  cannot  beHeve  that  man  is  capable 
of  seeing  earths  so  remote,  and  of  giving  any 
account  of  them  from  sensible  experience :  but 


133 


let  such  an  one  know,  that  the  spaces  and 
distances,  and  consequent  progressions,  which 
exist  in  the  natural  world,  are,  in  their  origin 
and  first  cause,  changes  of  the  state  of  interior 
things,  and  that  with  angels  and  spirits  they 
appear  according  to  such  changes;  (ss)  and 
that  therefore  angels  and  spirits  may  by  such 
changes  be  apparently  translated  from  one 
place  to  another,  and  from  one  earth  to  another, 
even  to  earths  at  the  extreme  boundaries  of  the 
universe.  The  case  is  the  same  also  with 
man  as  to  his  spirit,  and  therefore  he  also  may 
be  so  translated,  whilst  his  body  still  continues 
in  its  own  place.  This  has  been  the  case  with 
myself,  since  by  the  divine  mercy  of  the  Lord 
it  has  been  given  me  to  converse  with  spirits 
as  a  spirit,  and  at  the  same  time  with  men  as 
a  man.  The  sensual  man  is  not  capable  of 
conceiving  that  man  as  to  his  spirit  can  be 
thus  translated,  inasmuch  as  the  sensual  man 
is  immersed  in  space  and  in  time,  and  meas- 
ures his  progressions  accordingly. 

126.  That  there  are  several  worlds  or  sys- 
tems, may  appear  to  every  one  from  this  con- 

(ss)  That  motions,  progressions,  and  changes 
of  place,  in  another  life  are  changes  of  the  states 
of  the  interiors  of  life,  and  that  nevertheless  it 
really  appears  to  spirits  and  angels  as  if  they  ac- 
tually existed,  n.  1273  to  1277,  1377,  335G, 
5606,  10734. 

27 


134 


sideration,  that  so  many  stars  appear  in  the 
universe,  and  it  is  well  known  to  the  learned, 
that  every  star  is  like  a  sun  in  its  own  place, 
remaining  fixed  as  the  sun  of  our  earth  in  its 
place ;  and  that  it  is  owing  solely  to  distance 
that  it  appears  in  a  small  form  like  a  star ;  con- 
sequently, that  each  star  has  planets  revolving 
around  it,  which  are  so  many  earths,  in  like 
manner  as  the  sun  of  our  system  has ;  and  that 
the  reason  why  those  planets,  or  earths,  do  not 
appear,  is,  because  of  their  immense  distance, 
and  of  their  having  no  light  but  what  they  re- 
ceive from  their  own  star,  which  light  cannot 
be  reflected  so  far  as  to  reach  us.  For  what 
other  end  or  purpose,  shall  we  say,  was  so  large 
a  firmament  created  with  so  many  stars?  The 
end  of  the  creation  of  the  universe  is  man,  in 
order  that  an  angelic  heaven  might  be  formed 
of  men ;  but  what  would  mankind  and  an  an- 
gehc  heaven  from  one  single  earth  avail  to 
answer  the  purposes  of  an  infinite  Creator,  for 
which  a  thousand,  yea  ten  thousand  earths 
would  not  suffice  ?  By  calculation  it  appeared, 
tliat  supposing  there  were  in  the  universe 
1,000,000  earths,  and  on  every  earth  300,000,- 
000  men,  or  300  millions,  and  200  generations 
within  GOOO  years,  and  that  to  every  man  or 
spirit  was  alloted  a  space  of  three  cubic  ells,  in 
this  case  the  sum  of  men  or  spirits  collectively 
would  not  occupy  a  space  equal  to  a  thousandlii 


135 


part  of  this  earth,  consequently  not  more  than 
the  space  possessed  by  one  of  the  satellites  of 
Jupiter  or  Saturn,  which  would  be  a  space  so 
diminutive  in  respect  to  the  universe,  that  it 
would  be  scarce  discernible,  for  a  satellite  of 
Jupiter  or  Saturn  is  scarce  visible  to  the  naked 
eye.  And  what  would  this  be  in  regard  to 
the  purposes  of  the  Creator  of  the  universe, 
to  answer  which,  the  whole  universe,  though 
filled  with  earths,  would  be  inadequate,  for 
he  is  infinite?  In  discoursing  on  this  subject 
with  the  angels,  they  have  told  me,  that  they 
have  a  hke  idea  concerning  the  fewness  of  the 
human  race  in  respect  to  the  infinity  of  the 
Creator,  but  that  their  thoughts  on  the  subject 
originate  not  from  spaces,  but  from  states,  and 
that  according  to  their  idea,  supposing  the 
number  of  earths  to  be  as  many  myriads  as 
could  be  conceived  in  thought,  they  would  still 
be  as  nothing  to  the  Lord.  The  information 
which  1  am  going  to  give  concerning  the  earths 
in  the  starry  heaven,  is  from  experimental  tes- 
timony, whereby  it  will  likewise  appear,  how 
I  was  translated  thither  as  to  my  spirit,  whilst 
my  body  continued  in  its  own  place. 


28 


136 


Concerning  the  First  Earth  in  the  Starry  Hew 
rcn,  its  Spirits  and  Inhabitants. 

127.  I  WAS  led  bj"  angels  from  the  Lord  to 
a  certain  earth  in  the  starrv  heaven,  where  it 
was  given  to  take  a  view  of  the  earth  itself, 
yet  not  to  speak  with  the  inhabitants,  but  with 
spirits  who  came  from  thence  (for  all  the  in- 
habitants or  men  of  every  earth,  after  finishing 
their  course  of  hfe  in  the  world,  become  spir- 
its, and  remain  near  their  own  earth).  From 
tliese  however  I  received  information  concern- 
ing the  earth,  and  concerning  the  state  of  the 
inhabitants  thereof;  for  men,  when  they  leave 
the  body,  carry  whh  them  all  their  former  Hfe, 
and  all  their  memory,  (it)  To  be  led  to  earths 
in  the  universe,  is  not  to  be  led  and  translated 
thither  as  to  the  body,  but  as  to  the  spirit,  and 
the  spirit  is  led  by  variations  of  tlie  state  of  in- 
terior Hfe,  which  appear  to  it  as  progressions 
through  spaces.  Approaches,  or  near  ad- 
vancements, are  also  effected  according  to 
agreements  or  resemblances  of  states  of  Hfe, 
for  agreement  or  resemblance  produces  con- 
junction, whereas  disagreement  and  dissiraiH- 
tude  produces  disjunction.  Hence  it  may  ap- 
pear how  translation  is  effected  as  to  the  spirit, 

(tt)  That  man  after  death  retains  the  memory 
of  all  his  concerns  in  the  world,  n.  2476  to  2486. 


137 


and  its  approach  or  near  advancement  to  things 
remote,  whilst  the  man  still  remains  in  his  own 
place.  But  to  lead  a  spirit,  by  variations  of 
the  state  of  its  interiors,  out  oi  its  own  orb,  and 
to  cause  the  variations  successively  to  advance 
even  to  a  state  agreeing  with  or  like  to  those 
to  whom  it  is  led,  is  in  the  power  of  the  Lord 
alone ;  for  there  must  be  a  continual  direction 
and  foresight  from  first  to  last,  both  in  advanc- 
ing and  in  returning  back  again ;  especially  when 
the  translation  is  to  be  effected  with  a  man, 
who  is  still  as  to  the  body  in  the  natural  world, 
and  thereby  in  space.  That  such  a  transla- 
tion has  been  effected,  will  appear  incredible 
to  those  who  are  immersed  in  the  sensual  cor- 
poreal hfe,  and  whose  thoughts  originate  in 
sensual  corporeal  things,  nor  can  they  be  in- 
duced to  believe  it;  the  reason  is,  because  the 
sensual  corporeal  hfe  cannot  conceive  of  pro- 
gression without  space ;  but  they  who  think 
from  the  sensual  principle  of  their  spirit,  some- 
what removed  or  withdrawn  from  the  sensual 
principle  of  the  body,  consequently  who  think 
from  an  interior  principle  in  themselves,  may 
be  induced  to  believe  and  to  conceive  it,  since 
in  the  idea  of  interior  thought  there  is  neither 
space  nor  time,  but  instead  thereof  the  original 
principles  whence  spaces  and  times  had  birth. 
For  the  use  of  these  latter  the  following  ac- 
count is  written  respecting  the  earths  in  the 


138 


Starry  Heaven,  and  not  for  the  former,  (viz. 
such  as  are  immersed  in  the  sensual  corporeal 
life,)  unless  they  be  in  a  state  to  suffer  them- 
selves to  be  instructed. 

128.  At  a  time  when  I  was  broad  awake,  I 
was  led  as  to  the  spirit  by  angels  from  the 
Lord  to  a  certain  earth  in  the  universe,  accom- 
panied by  some  spirits  from  this  orb :  our  pro- 
gression was  in  a  direction  to  the  right,  and 
continued  for  two  hours.  Near  the  boundary 
of  our  solar  system  there  appeared  first  a 
whitish  cloud,  but  thick;  and  behind  it  a  fiery 
smoke  ascending  from  a  great  chasm ;  it  was  a 
vast  gulf  separating  on  that  side  our  solar  sys- 
tem from  some  other  systems  of  the  Starry 
Heaven.  The  fiery  smoke  appeared  at  a  con- 
siderable distance.  I  was  conveyed  through 
the  midst  of  it,  and  instantly  there  appeared 
beneath  in  the  chasm  or  gulf  several  men  who 
were  spirits  (for  spirits  appear  all  in  a  human 
form,  and  are  actually  men) ;  I  also  heard  them 
discoursing  with  each  other;  but  whence  they 
were,  or  of  what  sort,  it  was  not  given  to  know : 
one  of  them  however  told  me  that  they  were 
guards,  to  prevent  spirits  passing  from  this 
world  to  any  other  in  the  universe  without  hav- 
ing obtained  leave.  That  this  was  the  case, 
was  also  confirmed  by  this  circumstance,  that 
some  spirits,  who  were  in  company,  to  whom 
it  was  not  permitted  to  pass,  when  they  came 


139 


lo  lliat  great  gulf  or  interstice,  began  to  cry  out 
vehemently  that  they  were  lost  and  undone ;  for 
they  were  as  persons  struggling  in  the  agonies 
of  death,  wherefore  they  halted  on  that  side  of 
the  gulf,  nor  could  they  be  conveyed  further ; 
for  the  fiery  smoke  exhaling  from  the  gulf  af- 
fected them  powerfully  with  its  influence,  and 
thus  put  them  to  torture. 

129.  After  I  was  conveyed  through  that 
great  chasm,  I  at  length  arrived  at  a  place 
where  I  stopped ;  and  immediately  there  ap- 
peared to  me  spirits  from  above,  with  whom  it 
was  given  to  discourse.  From  their  discourse 
and  their  particular  maimer  of  apprehending 
and  explaining  things,  I  clearly  perceived  that 
they  were  from  another  earth,  for  they  differed 
altogether  from  the  spirits  of  our  solar  system. 
They  also  perceived  from  my  discourse  that  I 
came  from  afar. 

130.  After  discoursing  for  some  time  on  va- 
rious subjects,  I  asked  what  God  they  wor- 
shipped? They  said,  that  they  worshipped 
some  angel,  who  appeared  to  them  as  a  Divine 
Man,  being  bright  and  shining  with  light ;  and 
that  he  instructed  them,  and  gave  them  to  per- 
ceive what  they  ought  to  do.  They  said  fur- 
ther, that  they  knew  that  the  Most  High  God 
is  in  the  sun  of  the  angelic  heaven,  and  that  he 
ap})ears  to  his  angel,  and  not  to  them ;  and  that 
he  is  too  great  for  thein  to  dare  to  adore  him. 


140 


The  angel,  whom  they  worshipped,  was  an 
angehc  society,  to  which  it  was  granted  by  the 
Lord  to  preside  over  them,  and  to  teach  them 
the  way  of  what  is  just  and  right;  therefore 
they  have  hght  from  a  kind  of  flame,  which 
appears  hke  a  torch,  fiery  and  yellow  to  a  con- 
siderable degree;  the  reason  is,  because  they 
do  not  adore  the  Lord,  consequently  they  have 
not  light  from  the  sun  of  the  angelic  heaven, 
but  from  an  angelic  society,  for  an  angelic  so- 
ciety, when  it  is  granted  of  the  Lord,  can  ex- 
hibit such  a  light  to  spirits  who  are  in  an  infe- 
rior region.  That  angelic  society  was  also  seen 
by  me,  and  was  on  high  above  them ;  there 
was  also  seen  the  flaming  principle  whence  the 
light  proceeded. 

131.  As  to  the  rest  of  their  character,  they 
were  modest,  somewhat  simple,  but  still  under 
tolerably  good  influence  as  to  their  thoughts. 
From  the  light  which  was  amongst  them  might 
be  concluded  what  was  the  nature  and  quality 
of  their  intellectual  princijile,  for  the  intellect  is 
according  to  the  reception  of  the  light  which  is 
in  the  heavens,  inasmuch  as  divine  truth,  pro- 
ceeding from  the  Lord  as  a  sun,  is  what  shines 
there,  and  enables  the  angels  not  only  to  see 
but  also  to  understand,  (uu) 

(m)  That  there  is  great  light  in  the  heavens, 
n.  1117,  1521,  1522,  1533,  1G19  to  1632,  4527, 
5400,  8644.    That  all  light  iu  the  heavens  is 


141 


132.  I  was  instructed  that  the  inhabitants 
and  spirits  of  that  earth,  in  the  Grand  Man, 
have  relation  to  somevvliat  in  the  spleen,  in 
which  I  was  confirmed  by  an  influx  into  the 
spleen  whilst  they  were  discoursing  with  me. 

133.  Being  questioned  concerning  the  sun 
of  their  system,  which  enlightens  their  earth, 
they  said,  that  the  sun  there  has  a  flaming  ap- 
pearance, and  when  I  represented  the  size  of 
the  sun  of  our  earth,  they  said,  that  their's  was 
less ;  for  their  sun  to  our  eyes  is  a  star,  and  I 
was  told  by  the  angels  that  it  was  one  of  the 
lesser  stars.  They  said  also,  that  from  their 
earth  is  hkewise  seen  the  Starry  Heaven,  and 
that  a  star  larger  than  the  rest  appears  to  them 
westward,  which  was  declared  from  heaven  to 
be  our  sun. 

134.  After  this  my  sight  was  opened,  so 
that  I  could  look  in  some  degree  upon  their 
earth ;  and  there  appeared  several  green  fields 

from  the  Lord  as  a  sun  there,  n.  1053,  1521. 
3195,  3341,  3636,  4415,  9548,  9684,  10809, 
That  divine  truth  proceeding  from  the  Lord  ap- 
pears in  the  heavens  as  light,  n.  3195,  3222,5400, 
8644, 9399, 9548,  9684.  That  that  light  illumin- 
ates both  the  sight  and  the  understandings  of 
angels  and  spirits,  n.  2776,  3138.  That  the  light 
of  heaven  also  illuminates  the  understanding  of 
man,  n.  1524,  3138,  3167,  4408,  6608,  8707, 
9126, 9399,  10569. 


142 


and  forests  with  trees  in  full  foliage,  and  also  \ 
fleecy  sheep.  Afterwards  I  saw  some  of  the 
inhabitants,  who  were  of  the  meaner  class, 
clothed  nearly  like  the  country  people  in  Eu- 
rope. There  was  seen  also  a  man  with  his  \ 
wife  ;  she  appeared  of  handsome  stature  and 
graceful  mien,  so  likewise  did  the  man  ;  but 
what  surprised  me,  he  had  a  stately  carriage, 
and  a  deportment  which  had  a  semblance  of 
haughtiness,  but  the  woman's  deportment  was 
humble.  I  was  informed  by  the  angels,  that 
such  is  the  fashion  on  that  earth,  and  that  the 
men,  who  are  such,  are  beloved,  because  they 
are  nevertheless  well  disposed.  I  was  inform- 
ed likewise,  that  it  is  not  allowed  them  to  have 
more  wives  than  one,  because  it  is  contrary  to 
the  laws.  The  woman  whom  I  saw,  had  be- 
fore her  bosom  a  cloak  or  covering,  broad 
enough  to  conceal  herself  behind  it,  which  was 
so  contrived  that  she  could  put  her  arms  in  it, 
and  use  it  as  a  garment  to  cover  her,  and  so 
walk  about  her  business ;  it  might  be  tucked  up 
as  to  the  lower  part,  and  when  tucked  up  and 
applied  to  the  body,  it  appeared  like  a  sto- 
macher, such  as  are  worn  by  the  women  of  our 
earth  :  but  the  same  also  served  the  man  for  a 
covering,  and  he  was  seen  to  take  it  from  the 
woman,  and  apply  it  to  his  back,  and  loosen 
the  lower  part,  which  thus  flowed  down  to  his 
feet  like  a  gown,  and  clothed  in  this  manner  he 


143 


I  walked  off.  The  things  seen  on  that  earth 
were  not  seen  by  the  eyes  of  iny  body,  but  with 
the  eyes  of  my  spirit,  for  a  spirit  may  see  the 
things  wliich  are  on  any  earth,  when  it  is  grant- 
ed by  the  Lord. 

135.  Being  well  aware,  that  many  will 
doubt  the  possibility  of  man's  being  able  to  see, 
with  the  eyes  of  his  spirit,  any  thing  on  so  dis- 
tant an  earth,  it  may  be  expedient  to  declare 

I  how  the  matter  is.  Distances  in  another  hfe 
are  not  like  distances  here  on  earth ;  in  another 
life  they  are  altogether  according  to  the  states 
of  the  interiors  of  every  particular  person ;  they 
who  are  in  a  similar  state,  are  together  in  one 
society  and  in  one  place;  every  thing  is  pre- 
sent by  virtue  of  a  similitude  of  state,  and 
every  thing  is  distant  by  virtue  of  the  dissimil- 
itude of  state;  hence  it  was,  that  I  was  near  to 
the  above  earth,  when  I  was  brought  by  the 
Lord  into  a  state  similar  to  the  state  of  the 

j  spirits  and  inhabitants  thereof,  and  that  in  this 
case  being  present  I  discoursed  with  them : 
hence  it  is  evident,  that  earths  in  the  spiritual 
world  are  not  distant  as  in  the  natural  world, 
but  only  apparently  according  to  the  states  of 
life  of  the  inhabitants  and  spirits  of  each.  The 
state  of  life  is  the  state  of  the  affections  as  to 
love  and  faith.  In  regard  to  a  spirit,  or  what 
is  the  same  thing,  a  man  as  to  his  spirit,  seeing 
things  on  any  earth,  wc  shall  also  explain  how 


144 


this  h ;  neither  spirits  nor  angels,  by  their  own 
proper  sight,  can  see  any  thing  that  is  in  the 
natural  world  ;  for  the  light  of  the  natural 
world,  or  the  solar  light,  is  to  them  as  gross 
darkness;  in  like  manner  man,  by  his  bodily 
sight,  cannot  see  any  thing  that  is  in  the  other 
life,  for  the  light  of  heaven  is  to  him  as  gross 
darkness.  Nevertheless,  both  spirits  and  an- 
gels, when  it  pleases  the  Lord,  may  see  things 
in  the  natural  world  through  the  eyes  of  man; 
but  this  is  not  granted  of  the  Lord  except  with 
those,  to  whom  he  gives  to  discourse  with 
spirits  and  angels,  and  to  be  in  consort  with 
them.  It  has  been  given  them  to  see  through 
my  eyes  the  things  of  this  w^orld,  and  as  plainly 
as  I  myself  did  ;  and  also  to  hear  men  dis- 
coursing with  me.  Sometimes  it  has  happen- 
ed, that  through  me  they  saw  their  friends, 
with  whom  they  had  been  intimate  when  in  the 
body,  altogether  present  as  before,  at  which 
they  were  amazed.  Wives  have  in  this  man- 
ner seen  their  husbands  and  children,  and  have 
wished  me  to  tell  them  that  they  were  present 
and  looking  on  them,  and  that  I  would  men- 
tion the  particulars  of  their  state  in  the  other 
hfe ;  but  this,  I  said,  was  not  allowed,  by  rea- 
son that  they  would  have  called  me  mad,  or 
would  have  pronounced  my  information  to  be 
all  a  delirium  of  the  imagination,  inasmuch  as 
I  was  well  aware,  that  although  they  gave  as- 


145 


sent  with  their  Hps  to  the  doctrine  of  the  exist- 
ence of  such  spirits,  and  of  the  resurrection  of 
the  dead,  and  of  their  being  amongst  spirits, 
and  that  spirits  can  see  and  liear  by  means  of 
man,  yet  they  did  not  beheve  these  things  in 
their  hearts.  When  my  interior  sight  was  first 
opened,  and  they  who  are  in  another  hfe  saw 
through  my  eyes  the  world  and  the  things  con- 
tained therein,  they  were  so  amazed,  that  they 
called  it  the  miracle  of  miracles,  and  were  af- 
fected with  a  new  joy,  to  think  that  a  commu- 
nication was  thus  opened  of  earth  with  heaven, 
and  of  heaven  with  earth.  This  joy  continued 
for  some  months,  but  afterwards  the  circum- 
stance which  occasioned  it  became  so  familiar, 
that  now  the  wonder  has  ceased.  I  am  in- 
formed, that  spirits  and  angels  attendant  on 
other  men  see  not  the  least  of  the  things  of  this 
world,  but  only  perceive  the  thoughts  and 
affections  of  those  on  whom  they  attend. 
Hence  it  may  appear,  that  man  was  so  creat- 
ed, that  during  his  life  here  amongst  men  in  the 
world,  he  might  at  the  same  time  hve  in  hea- 
ven amongst  angels,  and  vice  versa,  so  that 
heaven  and  the  world  might  be  united  togedier 
and  act  in  unity  in  man,  and  men  might  know 
what  passes  in  heaven,  and  angels  what  passes 
in  the  world ;  and  that  when  men  depart  this 
life,  they  might  pass  thus  from  the  Lord's 
kingdom  on  the  earths  into  the  Lord's  king- 
29 


146 

dom  in  the  heavens,  not  as  into  another,  but 
as  into  the  same,  in  which  also  they  were  dur- 
ing their  Hfe  in  the  body ;  but  in  consequence 
of  becoming  so  corporeal,  man  closed  heaven 
against  himself. 

136.  Lastly,  I  discoursed  W'ith  the  spirits, 
who  were  from  the  above  earth,  concerning 
various  particulars  on  our  earth,  especially 
concerning  this  circumstance,  that  there  are 
sciences  cultivated  on  our  earth  which  are  not 
cultivated  on  other  earths,  as  astronomy,  geo- 
metry, mechanics,  physics,  chymistry,  medi- 
cine, optics,  and  natural  philosophy;  and  hke- 
wise  arts,  which  are  not  known  elsewhere,  as 
the  art  of  ship-building,  of  smelting  metals,  of 
writing  and  of  printing,  and  thus  of  communi- 
cating with  others  in  distant  parts  of  the  earth, 
and  also  of  preserving  what  is  communicated 
for  thousands  of  years,  and  that  this  art  has 
been  practised  in  regard  to  the  Word  which 
was  revealed  by  the  Lord,  and  that  conse- 
quently revelation  is  forever  permanent  on  our 
earth. 

137.  At  length  there  was  presented  to  my 
view  the  hell  of  those  who  are  from  that  earth, 
and  very  terrible  was  the  appearance  of  the 
infernals  seen  therein,  insomuch  that  I  dare 
not  describe  their  monstrous  faces.  There 
were  seen  also  female  magicians,  who  practise 
direful  arts;  they  appeared  clad  in  green,  and 
struck  me  with  horror. 


147 


Concerning  a  Second  Earth  in  the  Starry  Hear 
ven,  its  Sinrits  and  Inhabitants. 

138.  I  was  afterwards  led  of  the  Lord  to  an 
earth  in  the  universe,  which  was  further  dis- 
tant from  our  earth  than  the  foregoing,  of  which 
we  have  been  just  speaking ;  that  it  was  fur- 
tlier  distant,  was  plain  from  this  circumstance, 
tliat  I  was  two  days  in  being  led  thither,  as  to 
ray  spirit;  this  earth  was  to  the  left,  whereas 
the  former  was  to  the  right.  Inasmuch  as  re- 
moteness in  the  spiritual  world  does  not  arise 
from  distance  of  place,  but  from  difference  of 
state,  as  was  said  above,  therefore  from  the 
tediousness  of  my  progression  thither,  which 
lasted  two  days,  I  might  conclude,  that  the 
state  of  the  interiors  with  the  inhabitants  of 
that  earth,  which  is  the  state  of  affections  and 
of  consequent  thoughts,  differed  proportiona- 
bly  from  the  state  of  the  interiors  with  the 
spirits  from  our  earth.  Being  conveyed  thither 
as  to  the  spirit  by  changes  of  the  state  of  the 
interiors,  it  was  given  to  observe  the  success- 
ive changes  themselves  before  I  arrived  thither. 
This  was  done  whilst  I  was  awake. 

139.  When  I  arrived  thither,  the  earth  was 
not  seen  by  me,  but  only  the  spirits  who  were 
from  that  earth;  for,  as  was  said  above,  the 
spirits  of  every  earth  appear  about  their  own 


148 


particular  earth,  by  reason  that  they  are  of  a 
genius  and  temper  similar  to  that  of  the  inha- 
bitants, and  in  order  that  they  may  serve  them. 
Those  spirits  were  seen  at  a  considerable 
height  above  my  head,  whence  they  beheld 
me  as  I  approached.  It  is  to  be  observed, 
that  they  who  stand  on  high  in  another  life, 
can  behold  those  wlro  are  beneath  them,  and 
the  higher  they  stand,  the  greater  is  the  extent 
of  their  vision,  and  that  they  can  only  behold 
those  who  are  beneath  them,  but  likewise  dis- 
course with  them.  From  their  state  of  eleva- 
tion they  observed,  that  I  was  not  from  their 
earth,  but  from  some  other  at  a  great  distance; 
wherefore  they  accosted  me  in  questions  con- 
cerning various  particulars,  to  which  it  was 
given  me  to  reply ;  and  amongst  other  things  I 
related  to  them  to  what  earth  I  belonged,  and 
what  kind  of  earth  it  was;  and  afterwards  I 
spake  to  them  concerning  the  other  earths  in 
our  solar  system;  and  at  the  same  time  also 
concerning  the  spirits  of  the  earth  or  planet 
Mercury,  in  that  they  wander  about  to  several 
earths  for  the  purpose  of  procuring  for  them- 
selves knowledges  of  various  matters;  on  hear- 
ing this  they  said,  that  they  had  likewise  seen 
those  spirits  amongst  them. 

140.  It  was  told  me  by  the  angels  from  our 
earth,  that  the  inhabitants  and  spirits  of  that 
earth,  in  the  Grand  Man,  have  relation  to 


149 


KEENNESS  OF  VISION,  and  therefore  they  ap- 
pear on  high ;  and  that  they  are  also  remarkably 
clear-sighted.  In  consequence  of  their  having 
such  relation,  and  of  their  seeing  clearly  and 
distinctly  what  was  beneath  them,  in  discours- 
ing with  them  I  compared  them  to  eagles, 
which  fly  aloft,  and  enjoy  a  clear  and  exten- 
sive view  of  objects  beneath  ;  but  at  this  they 
expressed  indignation,  supposing  that  I  com- 
pared them  to  eagles  as  to  their  rapaciousness, 
and  consequently  that  I  thought  them  wicked ; 
but  I  replied,  that  1  did  not  liken  them  to 
eagles  as  to  rapaciousness,  but  as  to  sharp-sight- 
edness. 

141.  Being  questioned  concerning  the  God 
whom  they  worshipped,  they  replied,  that  they 
worshipped  a  God  visible  and  invisible,  a  God 
visible  under  a  human  form,  and  a  God  invisi- 
ble not  under  any  form;  and  it  was  discovera- 
ble from  their  discourse,  and  also  from  the 
ideas  of  their  thoughts  as  communicated  to 
me,  that  the  visible  God  was  our  Lord  himself, 
and  they  also  called  him  Lord.  To  this  it 
was  given  me  to  reply,  that  on  our  earth  also 
there  is  worshipped  a  God  invisible  and  visi- 
ble, and  that  the  invisible  God  is  called  Fa- 
ther, and  the  visible  is  called  Lord ;  and  that 
both  are  one,  as  he  himself  taught,  saying  that 
no  one  had  ever  seen  the  appearance  of  the 
Father,  but  that  the  Father  and  he  are  one, 
30 


150 


and  lliut  whoso  seeth  him  seclh  the  Father, 
and  that  the  Father  is  in  him  and  he  in  tiie 
Father ;  consequently  that  each  divine  princi- 
ple is  in  one  person.  That  these  are  the  Lord's 
own  words,  may  be  seen,  John  v.  37.  chap. 
X.  30.  chap.  xiv.  7,  9,  10,  11. 

142.  Presently  I  saw  other  spirits  from  the 
same  earth,  who  appeared  in  a  place  beneath 
the  former,  with  whom  also  I  discoursed ;  but 
they  were  idolaters,  for  they  worshipped  an 
idol  of  stone,  like  to  a  man,  but  not  handsome. 
It  is  to  be  observed,  that  all  who  come  into 
another  life,  have  at  first  a  worship  like  what 
they  practised  in  the  world,  but  that  they  are 
successively  separated  from  it ;  the  reason  is, 
because  all  worship  remains  implanted  in  man's 
interior  life,  from  which  it  cannot  he  removed 
and  eradicated  but  by  degrees.  On  seeing 
this,  it  was  given  me  to  tell  them,  that  they 
ought  not  to  worship  what  was  dead,  but  what 
was  hving;  to  which  they  repUed,  that  they 
knew  that  God  lives  and  not  a  stone,  but  that 
they  thought  of  the  living  God  when  they  look- 
ed on  a  stone  like  a  man,  and  that  otherwise 
the  ideas  of  their  thought  could  not  be  fixed 
upon  and  determined  to  the  invisible  God ;  it 
was  then  given  me  to  tell  them,  that  the  ideas 
of  thought  may  be  fixed  upon  and  determined 
to  the  invisible  God,  when  they  are  fixed  upon 
aiid  determined  to  the  Lord,  who  is  God  visi- 


151 


ble  in  thought  under  a  human  form ;  and  thus 
that  man  may  be  joined  with  the  invisible  God 
in  thought  and  aftection,  consequently  in  faith 
and  love,  when  he  is  joined  with  the  Lord,  but 
not  otherwise. 

143.  The  spirits  who  were  seen  on  high 
were  questioned,  whether  on  their  earth  they 
live  under  the  rule  of  princes  or  kings  ?  to 
which  they  replied,  that  they  know  not  what 
such  rule  is,  and  that  they  live  under  them- 
selves, being  distinguished  into  nations,  fami- 
lies, and  houses.  They  were  questioned 
further,  whether  they  are  thus  in  a  state  of  se- 
curity? They  replied  in  the  affirmative,  inas- 
much as  one  family  never  envies  another  in 
any  respect,  or  desires  to  deprive  another  of  its 
just  rights.  They  expressed  a  degree  of  in- 
dignation at  being  asked  these  questions,  as 
arguing  a  suspicion  of  their  hostility,  or  of 
their  want  of  protection  against  robbers  ;  what, 
said  they,  have  we  need  of  but  food  and  rai- 
ment, and  thus  to  live  content  and  quiet  one 
under  another  ? 

144.  Being  further  questioned  concerning 
their  earth  and  its  produce,  they  said,  that  they 
had  green  fields,  flower-gardens,  forests  full  of 
fruit-trees,  and  also  lakes  abounding  widi  fish  ; 
and  that  they  had  birds  of  a  blue  colour  with 
golden  feathers,  and  also  greater  and  lesser  ani- 
mals ;  amongst  the  lesser  they  mentioned  one 

31 


152 


sort,  which  had  the  hack  elevated  hke  camels 
on  our  earth;  nevertheless  that  they  did  not 
feed  on  their  flesh,  but  only  on  the  flesh  of  fish- 
es, and  besides  on  fruits  of  trees,  and  pulse  of 
the  earth.  They  said  moreover,  that  they  did 
not  hve  in  houses  regularly  built,  but  in  groyes, 
in  which  amongst  the  leaves  they  made  to 
themselves  shelter  against  rain  and  the  heat  of 
the  sun. 

145.  Being  questioned  concerning  their  sun, 
which  appears  as  a  star  from  our  earth,  they 
said,  that  it  has  a  fiery  appearance,  and  not 
larger  to  look  at  than  a  man's  head  ;  I  was  told 
by  the  angels,  that  the  star,  which  was  their 
sun,  was  amongst  the  lesser  stars,  not  far  distant 
from  the  equator. 

146.  There  were  seen  some  spirits,  who 
were  like  what  they  had  been  during  their 
abode  on  their  earth  as  men ;  they  had  faces 
not  unlike  those  of  the  men  of  our  earth,  ex- 
cept that  their  eyes  and  nose  were  less  :  this 
appearing  to  me  somewhat  of  deformity,  they 
said,  that  little  eyes  and  a  little  nose  were  ac- 
counted marks  of  beauty  with  them.  A  female 
was  seen,  clad  in  a  gown  ornamented  with 
roses  of  various  colours  :  I  asked,  whence  they 
were  supplied  with  materials  for  clothing  on 
their  earth?  They  answered,  that  they  gathered 
from  certain  plants  a  substance  which  they 
spun  into  thread  ;  and  that  immediately  after- 


153 


wards  they  laid  the  threads  in  double  and  triple 
rows,  moistening  them  with  a  glutinous  liquor, 
and  thus  giving  them  consistence ;  afterwards 
they  colour  the  cloth  thus  prepared  with  a 
substance  procured  from  the  juices  of  herbs. 
It  was  also  shewn  me  how  they  prepare  the 
thread  ;  the  women  sit  down  on  the  ground, 
and  wind  it  by  means  of  their  toes  ;  and 
when  wound  they  draw  it  towards  them,  and 
with  the  hand  spin  it  out  to  any  fineness  they 
please. 

147.  They  said  also,  that  on  that  earth  every 
husband  has  no  more  than  one  wife ;  and  that 
the  number  of  children  in  a  family  is  from  ten 
to  fifteen.  They  added,  that  there  are  found 
likewise  harlots  amongst  them,  but  that  all 
such,  after  the  hfe  of  the  body,  when  they  be- 
come spirits,  are  magicians,  and  are  cast  into 
hell. 


Concerning  a  Third  Earth  in  the  Starry  Heaven, 
its  Spirits  and  Inhabitants. 

148.  There  appeared  some  spirits  from 
afar,  who  were  not  willing  to  approach ;  the 
reason  was,  because  they  could  not  be  together 
with  the  spirits  of  our  earth,  who  were  then 
about  me;  hence  I  perceived  that  they  were 
from  another  earth;  and  I  was  afterwards  in- 
formed that  they  were  from  a  certain  earth  in 


154 


the  universe ;  but  where  that  earth  is,  was  not 
made  known  to  me.  Those  spirits  were  un- 
willing to  think  at  all  about  the  body,  or  even 
about  any  thing  corporeal  and  material,  con- 
trary to  the  spirits  of  our  earth ;  hence  it  was 
that  they  were  "not  willing  to  approach ;  nev- 
ertheless, after  the  removal  of  some  of  the 
spirits  of  our  earlli,  the)'  came  nearer  and  dis- 
coursed with  me.  But  instantty  there  was  felt 
an  ansiet}'  arising  from  the  colhsion  of  spheres; 
for  spiritual  spheres  encompass  all  spirits  and 
societies  of  spirits,  (cc)  and  inasmuch  as  they 
issue  from  the  life  of  the  afiections  and  conse- 
quent thoughts,  therefore  where  the  affections 
are  contrarj^  collision  takes  place,  and  hence 
conges  anxietj".  The  spirits  of  our  earth  re- 
lated, that  they  even  durst  not  approach  those 
other  spirits,  since  on  their  approach,  they 
were  not  only  seized  with  anxiety,  but  also 
appeared  to  themselves  as  if  the}'  were  bound 
hand  and  foot  with  serpents,  from  which  they 
could  not  be  loosed  but  by  retiring;  this  ap- 
pearance had  its  ground  in  correspondence; 
for  the  spirits  of  out  earth,  in  the  Graxd 
Man,  have  relation  to  the  external  sense,  con- 
sequently to  tlie  sensual  corporeal  principle, 
and  this  sensual  principle  is  represented  in  an- 
other life  by  serpents,  (zx) 

(xx)  That  the  sensual  external  principle  of 
man  in  the  spiritual  world  is  represented  by  ser- 
pents, as  beiug  in  the  lowest  principles,  and  in 


155 


149.  Such  being  the  iialuie  und  qiialily  of 
the  spirits  of  that  earth,  tiiey  appear  in  the 
eyes  of  other  spirits  not  as  others  in  a  distinct 
human  form,  but  as  a  cloud,  in  many  cases 
lilic  a  dusty  cloud,  with  whitish  tints  resembling 
somewhat  human ;  but  they  said,  that  within 
they  are  white,  and  that  when  they  become 
angels,  that  duskiness  is  changed  into  a  beau- 
tiful blue,  which  also  was  shewn  me.  I  ask- 
ed, whether  they  entertained  such  an  idea  con- 
cerning their  bodies  during  their  abode  in  the 
world  as  men?  They  replied,  that  the  men 
of  their  earth  make  no  account  of  their  bodies, 
but  only  of  the  spirit  in  the  body,  as  knowing 
that  the  spirit  will  live  forever,  but  that  the 
body  must  perish.  They  said  also,  that  several 
on  their  earth  believe  that  the  spirit  of  the  body 
has  existed  from  eternity,  and  was  infused  into 
the  body  when  they  were  conceived  in  the 
womb;  but  they  added,  that  now  they  know 
that  it  is  not  so,  and  that  they  repent  for  hav- 
ing even  entertained  so  false  an  opinion. 

150.  When  I  asked  them  whether  they 
were  willing  to  see  any  objects  on  our  earth, 
informing  them  that  it  was  possible  to  do  so 

respect  to  interior  things  in  man,  lying  on  the 
ground,  and  as  it  were  creeping;  and  that  hence 
they  were  called  serpents,  who  reasoned  from 
that  sensual  principle,  u.  195,  196,  197,  6398, 
6940. 


156 


through  my  eyes,  (see  above,  n.  135)  they 
answered  first,  that  they  could  not,  and  after- 
wards that  they  would  not,  inasmuch  as  they 
were  merely  terrestrial  and  material  objects, 
from  which  they  remove  their  thoughts  as  far 
as  possible.  Nevertheless,  there  were  repre- 
sented to  their  view  magnificent  palaces,  re- 
sembling those  in  which  kings  and  princes  dwell 
on  our  earth;  for  such  things  may  be  repre- 
sented before  spirits,  and  when  they  are  repre- 
sented, they  appear  exactly  as  if  they  existed  ; 
but  the  spirits  from  that  earth  made  light  of 
them,  calling  them  marble  images;  and  then 
related,  that  they  have  more  magnificent  ob- 
jects with  them,  which  are  their  sacred  tem- 
ples, not  built  of  stone,  but  of  wood.  When 
it  was  objected,  that  these  were  still  terrestrial 
objects,  they  repHed,  that  they  were  not  ter- 
restrial, but  celestial,  because  in  beholding 
them,  they  conceived  not  a  terrestrial  but  a 
celestial  idea;  believing  that  that  they  should 
see  hke  objects  in  heaven  after  death. 

151.  They  then  represented  their  sacred 
temples  before  the  spirits  of  our  earth,  who  de- 
clared, that  they  never  saw  any  thing  more 
magnificent;  and  as  they  were  seen  also  by 
myself,  therefore  I  can  describe  them.  They 
are  constructed  of  trees  not  cut  down,  but 
growing  in  the  place  where  they  were  first 
planted;  on  that  earth,  it  seems,  there  are 


157 


trees  of  an  extraordinary  size  and  height ;  these 
they  set  in  rows  when  young,  and  arrange 
them  in  such  order,  that  they  may  serve,  as 
they  grow  up,  to  form  porticos  and  galleries ; 
in  the  mean  while,  by  cutting  and  pruning  the 
tender  shoots,  they  fit  and  prepare  them  to 
entwine  one  with  another,  and  join  together,  so 
as  to  form  the  groundwork  and  floor  of  the 
temple  to  be  constructed,  and  by  a  side  eleva- 
tion to  serve  as  walls,  and  being  bended  into 
an  arch  above,  to  make  the  roof;  in  this  man- 
ner they  construct  the  temple  with  admirable 
art,  elevating  it  high  above  the  ground;  they 
prepare  also  an  ascent  into  it  by  continuous 
branches  of  the  trees  extended  from  the  trunk, 
and  firmly  connected  together.  Moreover 
they  adorn  the  temple  without  and  within  in 
various  ways,  by  disposing  the  leaves  into  par- 
ticular forms  :  thus  they  build  entire  groves. 
But  it  was  not  given  to  see  the  nature  of  the 
construction  of  these  temples  within,  only  I  was 
informed,  that  the  fight  of  their  sun  is  let  in  by 
apertures  amongst  the  branches,  and  is  every 
where  transmitted  through  crystals,  whereby 
the  light  falling  on  the  walls  is  refracted  in  di- 
vers colours  hke  those  of  the  rainbow,  particu- 
larly the  colours  of  blue  and  orange,  which 
they  are  most  fond  of.  Such  is  the  nature  of 
their  architecture,  the  works  whereof  they  pre- 
fer to  the  most  magnificent  palaces  of  our 
earth. 


158 


152.  They  said  further,  that  the  inhabitants 
do  not  dwell  in  high  places,  but  on  the  earth  in 
low  cottages,  by  reason  that  high  places  are 
for  the  Lord  who  is  in  heaven,  and  low  places 
for  men  who  are  on  eai'th.  Their  cottages 
were  also  shewn  me;  they  were  oblong,  hav- 
ing within  along  the  walls  a  continued  couch 
or  bed,  on  which  they  lie  one  next  to  another; 
on  the  side  opposite  to  the  door  was  a  kind  of 
alcove,  before  which  was  a  table,  and  behind 
it  a  fireplace,  by  which  Uie  whole  chamber  is 
enlightened.  In  the  fireplace  there  is  not  a 
burning  fire,  but  a  luminous  wood,  from  which 
issues  as  much  light  as  from  the  flame  of  a 
common  fire  :  thev  said,  that  in  an  evening  this 
wood  appeared  as  if  it  contained  in  it  hghted 
charcoal. 

153.  They  informed  me  further,  that  tliey 
do  not  hve  in  societies,  but  in  houses  apart  by 
themselves :  and  that  they  are  joined  in  socie- 
ties when  they  meet  at  divine  worship  ;  and 
that  on  these  occasions  they  who  are  teachers 
walk  beneath  in  the  temple,  and  the  rest  in 
piazzas  at  the  sides;  and  that  in  their  meetings 
thev  experience  interior  joys,  arising  from  the 
sight  of  the  temple,  and  from  the  worship 
therein  celebrated. 

154.  In  respect  to  didne  worship  they  said, 
that  they  acknowledge  God  under  a  human 
form,  consequently  our  Lord  ;  for  whosoever 
acknowledge  the  God  of  the  universe  under  a 


159 


human  form,  are  accepted  and  led  by  our  Lord ; 
the  rest  cannot  be  so  led,  because  they  think 
without  a  determination  of  the  thought  to  some 
specific  appearance.  They  added,  that  the 
inhabitants  of  their  earth  are  instructed  con- 
cerning the  things  of  heaven  by  some  imme- 
diate commerce  with  angels  and  spirits,  which 
may  be  more  easily  opened  to  them  than  to 
others,  by  reason  of  their  rejecting  corporeal 
things  from  their  thoughts  and  affections-  I 
asked  what  became  of  those  amongst  them  who 
are  wicked  ?  They  replied,  that  on  their  earth 
it  was  not  allowed  that  a  wicked  person  should 
exist;  but  if  any  one  gave  into  evil  thoughts  or 
evil  actions,  he  was  reprimanded  by  a  certain 
spirit,  and  threatened  with  death  if  he  persist- 
ed therein  ;  and  in  case  he  still  persisted,  he 
was  taken  off  by  a  swoon ;  and  that  by  this 
means  the  men  of  that  earth  are  preserved 
from  the  contagion  of  evils.  A  certain  spirit 
of  this  kind  was  sent  to  me;  he  spake  whh  me 
as  with  them ;  moreover  he  occasioned  some- 
what of  pain  in  the  region  of  my  abdomen,  in- 
forming me  that  this  was  the  method  he  uses 
with  those  who  give  into  evil  thoughts  and  evil 
actions,  and  to  whom  he  threatens  death  if  they 
persist.  I  was  given  to  understand,  that  they 
who  profane  holy  things  are  grievously  punish- 
ed ;  and  that  before  the  punishing  spirit  comes, 
there  appear  to  them  in  vision  the  jaws  of  a 


160 


lion  wide  open,  of  a  livid  colour,  who  seems  as 
if  he  would  swallow  their  head,  and  tear  it 
asunder  from  the  body,  and  hence  they  are 
seized  with  horror:  they  call  the  punishing 
spirit  the  devil. 

155.  Inasmuch  as  they  were  desirous  to 
Icnow,  how  we  are  circumstanced  on  our  earth 
in  regard  to  revelation,  I  informed  them,  that 
it  is  effected  by  writing  and  preaching  from  the 
Word,  and  not  by  immediate  commerce  whh 
spirits  and  angels  ;  and  that  what  is  WTitten 
may  be  printed  and  published,  and  thus  be 
read  and  comprehended  by  whole  societies, 
whereby  the  hfe  may  be  corrected  and  amend- 
ed. They  were  exceedingly  surprised,  that 
such  an  art  as  writing  and  printing,  utterly 
unknown  in  other  places,  could  exist  on  our 
earth  ;  but  they  comprehended,  that  on  this 
earth,  where  corporeal  and  terrestrial  things 
are  so  much  loved,  divine  things  from  heaven 
could  not  otherwise  flow  in  and  be  received  ; 
and  that  it  vrould  be  dangerous  for  persons  in 
such  circumstances  to  discourse  with  angels. 

156.  The  spirits  of  that  earth  appear  up- 
wards in  the  plane  of  the  head  towards  the 
right.  All  spirits  are  distinguished  by  their 
situation  in  respect  to  the  human  body,  which 
is  in  consequence  of  the  universal  heaven  cor- 
responding with  all  things  appertaining  to  man; 
these  spirits  keep  themselves  in  that  plane,  and 


161 


at  that  distance,  because  their  correspondence 
is  not  with  the  externals  but  with  the  interiors 
of  man.  Their  action  is  upon  the  left  knee, 
a  little  above  and  beneath,  with  a  kind  of  vi- 
bration very  sensibly  felt ;  this  is  a  sign  that 
they  correspond  with  the  conjunction  of  things 
natural  and  things  celestial. 


Concerning  a  Fourth  Earth  in  the  Starry  Hea- 
ven, its  Spirits  and  Inhabitants. 

157.  I  WAS  further  conducted  to  another 
earth  which  is  in  the  universe  out  of  our  solar 
system,  which  was  effected  by  changes  of  the 
state  of  my  mind,  consequently  as  to  the  spirit; 
for,  as  has  been  frequently  observed  above,  a 
spirit  is  conducted  from  place  to  place  no 
otherwise  than  by  changes  of  the  state  of  his 
interiors,  which  changes  appear  to  him  in  all 
respects  like  advancements  from  place  to  place, 
or  like  journeyings.  These  changes  continued 
without  intermission  for  about  ten  hours,  before 
I  came  from  the  state  of  my  own  life  to  the 
state  of  life  peculiar  to  the  spirits  of  that  earth, 
consequently  before  I  arrived  there  as  to  ray 
spirit.  I  was  carried  towards  the  east,  to  the 
left,  and  seemed  to  be  gradually  elevated  from 
an  horizontal  plane.  It  was  also  given  to  ob- 
serve clearly  a  progression  and  promotion  from 
32 


162 


a  former  place,  till  at  length  the  spirits  from 
whom  I  departed  no  longer  appeared  ;  and  in 
the  mean  lime  I  discoursed  on  various  subjects 
with  the  spirits  who  were  with  me.  A  certain 
spirit  was  also  with  us,  who,  during  his  abode 
in  the  world,  had  been  a  prelate,  and  a  preach- 
er, and  hkewise  a  very  pathetic  writer.  From 
the  idea  concerning  him  in  me,  the  attendant 
spirits  supposed,  that  he  was  a  christian  in 
heart  superior  to  the  rest ;  for  in  the  world  an 
idea  is  conceived,  and  judgment  formed  from 
preaching  and  writing,  and  not  from  the  life, 
if  it  is  not  attended  with  some  extraordinary 
circumstances ;  and  in  case  any  thing  in  the 
life  appears  which  does  not  agree  with  the 
preaching  and  writing,  it  is  nevertheless  ex- 
cused ;  for  the  idea,  or  thought  and  perception 
concerning  any  particular  person,  gives  a  bias 
to  the  judgment  in  all  things,  incHning  it  in 
favour  of  such  idea,  thought,  and  perception. 

158.  After  this  I  observed  that  I  was  in  the 
Starry  Heaven,  as  to  my  spirit,  far  out  of  our 
solar  system ;  for  this  may  be  observed  from 
the  changes  of  state,  and  consequent  apparent 
continued  progression,  which  lasted  nearly  ten 
hours.  At  length  I  heard  spirits  discoursing 
near  some  earth,  which  was  afterwards  also 
seen  by  me  ;  when  I  was  come  near  them, 
after  some  discourse  together,  they  said,  that 
strangers  sometimes  come  to  them  from  a  dis- 


1G3 


tance,  who  discourse  with  them  concerning 
God,  and  confuse  the  ideas  of  their  thought. 
They  pointed  also  at  the  way  by  which  such 
strangers  came,  whereby  it  was  perceivable, 
that  they  were  from  the  spirits  of  our  earth. 
On  questioning  them  as  to  the  confusion  caused 
in  their  ideas,  they  said,  that  it  arose  from  those 
strangers  asserting,  that  they  ought  to  believe 
on  a  divine  principle  distinguished  into  three 
persons,  which  they  nevertheless  call  one  God ; 
and  on  examining  the  idea  of  their  thoughts, 
it  is  presented  as  a  threefold  principle  ( trinum ) 
not  continuous  but  discrete,  and  with  some,  as 
three  persons  discoursing  with  each  other,  and 
with  some,  as  two  seated  together,  one  near 
the  other,  and  a  third  hearkening  to  them,  and 
going  from  them  ;  and  ahhough  they  call  each 
person  God,  and  form  a  different  idea  con- 
cerning each,  still  they  declare  them  but  one 
God.  They  complained  exceedingly,  that 
hereby  their  ideas  were  confused,  in  that  these 
strangers  conceived  three  in  thought,  and  in 
speech  profess  one,  when  neverthless  thought 
and  speech  ought  ever  to  be  in  agreement 
with  each  other.  The  spirit,  who  in  the  world 
had  been  a  prelate  and  a  preacher,  and  who 
also  was  with  me,  was  then  examined  as  to  the 
idea  he  entertained  respecting  one  God  and 
three  persons,  when  it  was  discovered,  that 
he  represented  to  himself  three  Gods,  but 


164 


making  one  by  continuity  ;  he  conceived  how- 
ever this  threefold  unity  as  invisible  because 
it  was  divine  ;  and  from  this  his  conception  it 
was  perceivable,  that  he  thought  only  of  the 
Father,  and  not  of  the  Lord,  and  that  his  idea 
concerning  the  invisible  God  was  no  other  than 
as  of  nature  in  her  first  principles,  the  result 
of  which  idea  was,  that  the  inmost  principle  of 
nature  was  his  divine  principle,  and  thus  that 
he  might  easily  be  hence  led  to  acknowledge 
nature  as  God.  It  is  well  to  be  observed,  that 
the  idea  which  any  person  entertains  concern- 
ing any  thing,  in  another  world  is  presented 
to  the  lite,  and  thereby  every  one  is  examined 
as  to  the  nature  of  his  thought  and  perception 
respecting  the  things  of  faith  ;  and  that  the 
idea  of  the  thought  concerning  God  is  the  chief 
of  all  others,  inasmuch  as  by  that  idea,  if  it  be 
genuine,  conjunction  is  effected  with  the  Di- 
vine Being,  and  consequently  with  heaven. 
They  were  afterwards  questioned  concerning 
the  nature  of  their  idea  respecting  God  ?  They 
replied,  that  they  did  not  conceive  God  as  in- 
visible, but  as  visible  under  a  human  form ;  and 
that  they  knew  him  to  be  thus  visible,  not  only 
from  an  interior  perception,  but  also  from  this 
circumstance  that  he  has  appeared  to  them 
as  a  man  ;  they  added,  that  if,  according  to 
the  idea  of  some  strangers,  they  should  con- 
ceive God  as  invisible,  consequently  without 


165 


form  and  quality,  they  should  not  be  able  in 
any  wise  to  think  about  God,  inasmuch  as 
such  an  invisible  principle  falls  not  upon  any 
idea  of  thought.  On  hearing  this,  it  was  given 
to  tell  them,  that  they  do  well  to  think  of  God 
under  a  human  form,  and  that  many  on  our 
earth  think  in  like  manner,  especially  when 
they  think  of  the  Lord  ;  and  that  the  ancients 
also  thought  according  to  this  idea.  I  then 
told  them  concerning  Abraham,  Lot,  Gideon, 
Manoah  and  his  wife,  and  what  is  related  of 
them  in  our  Word,  viz.  that  they  sav/  God  un- 
der a  human  form,  and  acknowledged  him 
thus  seen  to  be  the  Creator  of  the  universe, 
and  called  him  Jehovah,  and  this  also  from  an 
interior  perception ;  but  that  at  this  day  that 
interior  perception  was  lost  in  the  christian 
world,  and  only  remains  with  the  simple  who 
are  principled  in  faith. 

159.  Previous  to  this  discourse,  they  be- 
lieved that  our  company  also  consisted  of  those, 
who  were  desirous  to  confuse  them  in  their 
thoughts  of  God  by  an  idea  of  three  ;  where- 
fore on  hearing  what  was  said,  they  were  af- 
fected with  joy,  and  replied,  that  there  were 
also  sent  from  God,  (whom  they  then  called 
the  Lord)  those  who  teach  them  concerning 
him,  and  that  they  are  not  willing  to  admit 
strangers,  who  perplex  them,  especially  by 
the  idea  of  three  persons  in  the  Divinity,  in- 
33 


166 


asmuch  as  they  know  that  God  is  one,  conse- 
quently that  the  divine  principle  is  one,  and 
not  consisting  of  three  in  unanimity,  unless 
such  threefold  unanimity  be  conceived  to  ex- 
ist in  God  as  in  an  angel,  in  whom  there  is 
an  inmost  principle  of  life,  which  is  invisible, 
and  which  is  the  ground  of  his  thought  and 
wisdom,  and  an  external  principle  of  life  which 
is  visible  under  a  human  form,  whereby  he 
sees  and  acts,  and  a  proceeding  principle  of 
life,  which  is  the  sphere  of  love  and  of  faith 
issuing  from  him  (for  from  every  spirit  and 
angel  there  proceeds  a  sphere  of  hfe,  whereby 
he  is  known  at  a  distance)  (cc)  ;  which  pro- 
ceeding principle  of  life,  when  considered  as 
issuing  from  the  Lord,  is  the  essential  divine 
principle  which  fills  and  constitutes  the  hea- 
vens, because  it  proceeds  from  the  very  ESSE 
of  the  life  of  love  and  of  faith  ;  they  said,  that 
in  this,  and  in  no  other  manner,  they  can  per- 
ceive and  apprehend  a  threefold  unity.  When 
they  had  thus  expressed  themselves,  it  was 
given  me  to  inform  them,  that  such  an  idea 
concerning  a  threefold  unity  agrees  with  the 
idea  of  the  angels  concerning  the  Lord,  and 
that  it  is  grounded  in  the  Lord's  own  doc- 
trine respecting  himself;  for  he  teaches  that 
the  Father  and  himself  are  one  ;  that  the 
Father  is  in  him  and  he  in  the  Father  ;  that 
whoso  sees  him  sees  the  Father  ;  and  whoso 


1G7 


believes  on  him  believes  on  the  Father  and 
knows  the  Father ;  also  that  the  Comforter, 
whom  he  calls  the  Spirit  of  Truth,  and  like- 
wise the  Holy  Ghost,  proceeds  from  him,  and 
does  not  speak  from  himself  but  from  him,  by 
which  Comforter  is  meant  the  divine  proceed- 
ing principle.  It  was  given  me  further  to  tell 
them,  that  their  idea  concerning  a  threefold 
unity  agrees  with  the  ESSE  and  EXISTERE 
of  the  life  of  the  Lord  when  in  the  world  ;  the 
ESSE  of  his  Hfe  was  the  Essential  Divine  Prin- 
ciple, for  he  was  conceived  of  Jehovah,  and 
the  esse  of  every  one's  life  is  that  whereof  he 
is  conceived  ;  the  EXISTERE  of  life  derived 
from  that  ESSE  is  the  Human  Principle  in 
form  ;  the  esse  of  the  life  of  every  man,  which 
he  has  from  his  father,  is  called  soul,  and  the 
existere  of  life  thence  derived  is  called  body  ; 
soul  and  body  constitute  one  man  ;  the  like- 
ness between  each  resembles  that  which  sub- 
sists between  a  principle  which  is  in  effort 
^conatus,^  and  a  principle  which  is  in  act  de- 
rived from  effort,  for  act  is  an  effort  acting, 
and  thus  two  are  one  :  effort  in  man  is  called 
will,  and  effort  acting  is  called  action  ;  the 
body  is  the  instrumental  part,  whereby  the 
will,  which  is  the  principal,  acts,  and  the  instru- 
mental and  principal  in  acting  are  one  ;  such 
is  the  case  in  regard  to  soul  and  body,  and 
such  is  the  idea  which  the  angels  in  heaven 


168 


have  respecting  soul  and  body ;  hence  they 
know,  that  the  Lord  made  his  human  principle 
divine  by  virtue  of  the  divine  principle  in  him- 
self, which  was  to  him  a  soul  from  the  Father. 
This  is  agreeable  also  to  the  creed  received 
throughout  the  christian  world,  which  teaches, 
that  "  Although  Christ  is  God  and  Man,  yet 
he  is  not  two  but  one  Christ ;  yea  he  is  alto- 
gether one  and  a  single  person  ;  for  as  body 
and  soul  are  one  man,  so  also  God  and  Man 
is  one  Christ.''  (yy)  Inasmuch  as  there  was 
such  an  union,  or  such  a  oneness  in  the  Lord, 
therefore  he  rose  again, not  only  as  to  soul, but 
also  as  to  body,  which  is  not  the  case  with  any 
man  ;  concerning  which  circumstance  he  also 
instructed  his  disciples  in  these  words,  "Han- 
dle me  and  see,  for  a  spirit  hath  not  flesh  and 
bones,  as  ye  see  me  have."  (zz)  Those  spirits 
understood  clearly  this  discourse,  such  things 
being  suited  to  the  understanding  of  angelic 
spirits  ;  they  instantly  added,  that  the  Lord 

(yy)  From  the  Athanasian  creed. 

(zz)  That  immediately  after  death  man  rises 
again  as  to  his  spirit;  and  that  he  is  in  a  human 
form,  and  that  he  is  a  man  in  all  and  every  re- 
spect, n.  4527,  5006,  5078,  8939,  8991,  10594, 
10597,  10758.  That  a  man  rises  again  only  as 
to  spirit,  and  not  as  to  body,  n.  10593,  10594. 
That  the  Lord  alone  rose  again  as  to  body  also, 
n.  1729,  2083,  5078,  10825. 


160 


alone  has  power  in  the  heavens,  and  that  the 
heavens  are  his  ;  to  which  it  was  given  to 
reply,  that  this  is  known  also  to  the  church  on 
our  earth  from  the  Lord's  declaration  before 
he  ascended  into  heaven,  for  he  then  said, 
power  is  given  to  me  in  heaven  and  in  earth." 

160.  Afterwards  I  discoursed  with  those 
spirits  concerning  their  earth;  for  all  spirits 
have  knowledge  of  the  things  relating  to  the 
earth  they  came  from,  when  their  natural  or 
external  memory  is  opened  by  the  Lord  ;  inas- 
much as  this  memory  remains  with  them  after 
death,  but  it  is  not  opened  except  at  the  Lord's 
good  pleasure.  Then  they  related  concerning 
their  earth  from  which  they  came,  that  when 
it  is  allowed  them,  they  appear  to  the  inhabit- 
ants, and  discourse  with  them  as  men ;  and  that 
this  is  effected  by  their  being  let  into  their  na- 
tural or  external  memory,  and  consequently 
into  the  thoughts  which  they  had  during  their 
abode  in  the  world  ;  and  that  on  such  occasions 
the  inhabitants  have  their  interior  sight,  or  sight 
of  their  spirits,  opened,  whereby  they  are  seen  : 
they  added,  that  the  inhabitants  at  such  times 
know  no  other  than  that  they  are  men  of  their 
earth,  and  that  they  then  first  perceive  them 
not  to  be  men,  when  they  are  suddenly  taken 
away  from  their  sight.  I  told  them,  that  this 
was  the  case  also  on  our  earth  in  ancient  times, 
as  when  angels  appeared  to  Abraham,  Sarah, 
34 


170 


Lot,  the  inhabitants  of  Sodom,  Manoah  and 
his  wife,  Joshua,  Mary,  EHzabeth,  and  the 
Prophets  in  general;  and  that  the  Lord  ap- 
peared in  hke  manner,  and  they  who  saw  him 
knew  no  other  than  that  he  was  a  man  of  the 
earth,  before  he  revealed  himself.  But  that 
at  this  day  such  appearances  are  seldom  ex- 
hibited, the  reason  whereof  is,  lest  men  by  such 
things  should  be  compelled  to  believe,  for  faith 
wrought  by  compulsion,  such  as  is  the  faith 
which  enters  by  miracles,  is  not  inherent,  and 
would  also  be  hurtful  to  those,  in  whom  faith 
may  be  implanted  by  the  Word  in  a  state  with- 
out compulsion. 

161.  The  spirit  who  had  been  a  prelate 
and  a  preacher  in  the  world,  was  altogether 
indisposed  to  believe,  that  any  other  earths 
existed  besides  our  own,  in  consequence  of 
having  thought  in  the  world,  that  the  Lord  was 
born  on  this  earth  alone,  and  that  none  could 
be  saved  without  the  Lord,  wherefore  he  was 
reduced  into  a  state  similar  to  that  which  spirits 
are  reduced  into,  when  they  appear  on  their 
own  earth  as  men,  concerning  which  state  see 
above  ;  and  thus  he  was  let  into  that  earth,  so 
that  he  not  only  saw  it,  but  also  discoursed  with 
its  inhabitants :  hereupon  a  communication  was 
also  thereby  granted  me,  so  that  I  in  like  man- 
ner saw  the  inhabitants,  and  likewise  some 
particular  things  on  that  earth  (see  above,  n. 


171 


135).  There  appeared  then  four  kinds  of 
men,  but  one  kind  after  the  other  in  succes- 
sion; at  first  there  were  seen  men  clothed; 
next  to  them  in  order  of  succession,  men  nak- 
ed of  a  human  flesh  colour;  afterwards  men 
naked,  but  with  inflamed  bodies:  and  lastly- 
black  men. 

162.  Whilst  the  spirit,  who  had  been  a  pre- 
late and  a  preacher,  was  with  those  who  were 
clothed,  there  appeared  a  woman  of  a  very 
beautiful  countenance,  in  a  plain  simple  dress, 
her  gown  flowing  gracefully  behind  her,  with 
sleeves  also  for  the  arms;  her  head-dress  was 
beautiful,  in  the  form  of  a  chaplet  of  flowers. 
That  spirit  was  exceedingly  delighted  at  the 
sight  of  this  virgin ;  he  discoursed  with  her, 
and  also  took  her  by  the  hand ;  but  inasmuch 
as  she  perceived  that  he  was  a  spirit,  and  not 
of  that  earth,  she  rushed  hastily  away  from 
him.  Afterwards  there  appeared  to  him  on 
the  right  several  other  women,  who  had  the 
care  of  sheep  and  lambs,  which  at  that  time 
they  were  leading  to  a  watering-trough,  which 
was  supplied  with  water  by  a  small  drain  from 
a  certain  lake;  these  women  were  clothed  in 
like  manner  with  the  former ;  they  had  in  their 
hands  shepherds'  crooks,  by  which  they  led 
the  sheep  and  lambs  to  drink;  they  said,  that 
which  way  soever  they  pointed  with  their 
crooks,  thither  the  sheep  went.  The  sheep 
35 


172 


which  we  saw  were  large,  with  broad  woolly 
tails.  The  faces  of  the  women,  when  viewed 
more  closely,  were  full  and  handsome.  There 
were  seen  also  men  ;  their  complexion  was 
like  that  of  the  men  of  our  earth,  but  with  this 
difference,  that  the  lower  part  of  the  face  was 
black  instead  of  a  beard,  and  the  nose  was 
more  of  a  snowy  white  than  a  flesh  colour. 
Afterwards  the  spirit,  who,  as  was  said,  had 
been  a  preacher  in  the  w^orld,  was  led  on  fur- 
ther, but  reluctantly,  because  his  thoughts  were 
still  engaged  about  the  woman  with  whom  he 
was  delighted,  as  was  evident  from  this  cir- 
cumstance, that  there  still  appeared  somewhat 
of  his  shadow  in  the  former  place;  then  he 
came  to  those  who  were  naked ;  they  were  seen 
walking  together  two  and  two,  husband  and 
wife,  having  a  covering  about  the  loins,  and 
also  around  the  head.  That  spirit,  when  he 
was  with  these  inhabitants,  was  led  into  the 
state  in  which  he  was  in  the  world  when  he  was 
disposed  to  preach,  and  instantly  said,  that  he 
would  preach  before  them  the  Lord  crucified ; 
but  they  said,  that  they  were  not  willing  to  hear 
any  such  thing,  because  they  knew  not  what 
was  meant  by  the  Lord  crucified,  but  knew 
that  the  Lord  is  living.  He  then  said,  that 
he  would  preach  the  living  Lord,  but  this  also 
they  refused  to  hear,  saying  that  the)^  perceiv- 
ed in  his  discourse  somewhat  not  celestial,  be- 


173 


cause  it  had  much  respect  to  himself,  his  own 
fame  and  reputation;  and  that  they  could  dis- 
tinguish from  the  tone  of  voice,  whether  the 
discourse  came  from  the  heart,  or  not;  and 
that  hence  they  pronounced  him  incapable  of 
teaching  them;  wherefore  he  was  silent.  Dur- 
ing his  life  in  the  world  he  had  been  a  very 
pathetic  preacher,  so  that  he  could  excite  in 
his  hearers  very  holy  influences ;  but  this  pa- 
thetic manner  had  been  acquired  by  art,  con- 
sequently it  was  derived  from  self  and  the 
world,  and  not  from  heaven. 

163.  They  said  moreover,  that  they  had  a 
perception  whether  there  be  any  conjugal  prin- 
ciple with  those  of  their  nation  who  are  naked ; 
and  it  was  shewn,  that  they  perceive  this  by 
virtue  of  a  spiritual  idea  concerning  marriage, 
which  idea  being  communicated  to  me  was  to 
this  effect,  that  a  likeness  of  interiors  was  form- 
ed by  the  conjunction  of  goodness  and  truth, 
consequently  of  love  and  faith,  and  that  con- 
jugal love  existed  from  that  conjunction  de- 
scending by  influx  into  the  body  ;  for  all  things 
appertaining  to  the  mind  are  presented  in  some 
natural  appearance  in  the  body,  consequently 
in  the  appearance  of  conjugal  love,  when  the 
interiors  of  two  persons  mutually  love  each 
other,  and  also  by  virtue  of  that  love  are  de- 
sii'ous  to  will  and  to  think  the  one  as  the  other, 
and  thus  to  abide  and  be  joined  together  as  to 


174 


the  interiors  of  the  mind  ;  hence  spiritual  affec- 
tion, which  appertains  to  the  mind,  becomes 
natural  affection  in  the  body,  and  clothes  itself 
with  the  sense  of  conjugal  love  :  spiritual  af- 
fection appertaining  to  the  mind  is  the  affection 
of  goodness  and  truth,  and  of  their  conjunction, 
for  all  things  appertaining  to  the  mind,  or  to 
the  thinking-principle  and  the  will-principle, 
have  relation  to  truth  and  good.  They  said 
further,  that  it  is  altogether  impossible  for  any 
conjugal  principle  to  exist  between  one  man 
and  several  wives,  inasmuch  as  the  marriage 
of  goodness  and  truth,  which  appertains  to  the 
mind,  can  exist  only  between  two. 

164.  After  this  the  above  spirit  came  to 
those  who  were  naked,  but  whose  bodies  were 
inflamed  ;  and  lastly  to  those  who  were  black, 
some  of  whom  were  naked,  and  some  clothed  ; 
but  both  the  latter  and  the  former  dwelt  in  a 
distant  part  of  the  same  earth;  for  a  spirit  may 
be  led  in  an  instant  to  places  far  asunder,  in- 
asmuch as  he  does  not  proceed  and  advance 
like  man  b_v  spaces,  but  by  changes  of  state, 
see  above,  n.  125,  127.  (ss) 

165.  I  lastly  discoursed  with  the  spirits  of 
that  earth  concerning  the  belief  of  the  inhab- 
itants of  our  earth  in  regard  to  a  resurrection, 
in  that  they  cannot  conceive  that  men  come 
into  another  life  immediately  after  death,  and 
then  appear  like  men  as  to  the  face,  the  body, 


175 


the  arras,  the  feet,  and  all  the  external  and 
internal  senses ;  still  less  can  they  conceive 
that  they  are  then  clothed  in  raiment ;  and 
that  they  have  places  of  abode  and  habitations ; 
and  this  solely  by  reason  that  the  thoughts  of 
the  generality  of  persons  on  this  earth  are 
grounded  in  the  things  of  sense,  which  apper- 
tain to  the  body,  and  therefore  they  believe 
in  the  existence  of  nothing  but  what  they  see 
and  touch ;  and  few  can  be  withdrawn  from 
external  and  sensible  things  to  things  of  an  in- 
terior nature,  and  thus  be  elevated  into  the 
light  of  heaven,  in  which  such  interior  things 
are  perceived  :  hence  it  is,  that  in  regard  to 
the  soul  or  spirit,  they  cannot  form  any  idea 
of  it  as  of  a  man,  but  as  of  wind,  of  air,  or  of 
a  phantom  without  form,  in  which  notwithstand- 
ing there  is  some  vital  principle.  This  is  the 
reason  why  they  do  not  believe  that  they  shall 
rise  again  till  the  end  of  the  world,  which  they 
call  the  last  judgment,  at  which  time  they  sup- 
pose that  the  body,  although  mouldered  into 
dust,  and  dissipated  by  every  wind,  will  be 
brought  back  again  and  joined  to  its  soul  or  spirit. 
I  added,  that  it  is  permitted  they  should  thus 
believe,  inasmuch  as  it  cannot  otherwise  be 
conceived  by  those,  whose  thoughts,  as  was 
said,  are  grounded  in  things  of  sense,  that  the 
soul  or  spirit  can  live  as  a  man  in  a  human 
form,  unless  it  receives  again  that  body  with 


176 


which  it  was  clothed  in  the  world  ;  wherefore 
unless  it  was  asserted  that  that  body  is  to  rise 
again,  they  would  reject  in  the  heart  tlie  doc-, 
trine  concerning  a  resurrection  and  eternal  hfe 
as  incomprehensible.  But  still  this  thought 
concerning  a  resurrection  has  this  advantage 
attending  it,  that  it  leads  them  to  believe  in  a 
hfe  after  death,  the  consequence  of  which  be- 
lief is,  that  when  they  come  to  he  on  a  sick 
bed,  and  their  thoughts  are  not  influenced,  as 
before,  by  worldly  and  corporeal  things,  that 
is,  by  things  of  sense,  they  then  beheve  that 
they  shaU  live  immediately  after  their  decease; 
they  then  also  speak  about  heaven,  and  about 
the  hope  of  Hving  there  immediately  after  death, 
with  ideas  very  different  from  those  suggested 
by  their  doctrine  concerning  the  last  judg- 
ment. I  related  further,  that  it  had  sometimes 
been  matter  of  surprise  to  me,  that  when  they 
who  are  principled  in  faith  speak  of  a  life  after 
death,  and  of  their  friends  and  relatives  who 
are  deceased,  and  at  such  times  do  not  think 
about  the  last  judgment,  they  then  believe 
that  their  friends  and  relatives  live  as  men  im- 
mediately on  their  decease  :  but  this  idea,  as 
soon  as  ever  a  thought  concerning  the  last 
judgment  flows  in,  is  changed  into  a  material 
idea,  concerning  their  terrestrial  body,  that  it 
is  again  to  be  joined  to  their  soul ;  for  they  do 
not  know  that  every  man  is  a  spirit  as  to  his 


177 


interiors,  and  that  it  is  this  spirit  which  hves 
in  the  body,  and  in  all  its  parts,  and  not  the 
body  which  lives  of  itself ;  and  that  it  is  from 
the  spirit  of  every  one  that  the  body  has  its 
human  form,  consequently  it  is  the  spirit  of 
every  one  which  is  principally  man,  and  in  like 
form  as  man,  but  invisible  to  the  eyes  of  the 
body,  yet  visible  to  the  eyes  of  spirits  ;  hence 
also,  when  the  sight  of  man's  spirit  is  opened, 
which  is  effected  by  the  removal  of  the  bodily 
sight,  angels  appear  as  men  :  thus  angels  ap- 
peared to  the  ancients,  according  to  what  is 
written  in  the  Word.  In  my  discourse  also 
with  spirits,  whom  I  had  been  acquainted  with 
during  their  abode  in  the  world,  I  have  occa- 
sionally asked  them,  whether  they  had  any 
inclination  to  be  clothed  again  with  their  ter- 
restrial bodies,  as  they  had  once  thought  would 
be  the  case  ?  but  they  started  at  the  very  idea 
of  such  a  conjunction,  being  full  of  confusion 
and  amazement  to  think,  that  whilst  they  were 
in  the  world,  they  should  be  under  the  influ- 
ence of  so  bhnd  a  behef,  void  of  all  under- 
standing. 

166.  Moreover  on  that  earth  were  seen  the 
habitations  of  the  inhabitants,  which  were  low 
houses  of  a  considerable  length,  with  windows 
on  the  sides  according  to  the  number  of  the 
rooms  or  chambers  into  which  they  were  di- 
vided ;  the  roof  was  round,  and  there  was  a 


178 


door  on  both  sides  at  each  end ;  we  were  told 
that  they  were  built  of  common  soil,  and  co- 
vered with  turf;  and  that  the  windows  were 
constructed  of  threads  of  grass,  so  entwined 
together,  that  the  light  was  transparent.  Little 
children  were  also  seen,  and  we  were  told  that 
their  neighbours  visit  them,  especially  for  the 
sake  of  their  children,  that  they  may  be  in 
company  with  other  children  in  the  presence 
and  under  the  control  of  their  parents.  There 
appeared  also  fields  full  of  growing  corn  which 
was  at  that  time  nearly  ripe  for  harvest  ;  the 
seeds  or  grains  of  their  corn  were  shewn  us, 
which  were  like  those  of  Chinese  wheat ;  we 
saw  likewise  some  bread  made  thereof,  which 
was  in  small  square  loaves.  Moreover  there 
appeared  also  plains  of  grass  adorned  with 
flowers,  and  likewise  trees  laden  with  fruits 
like  pomegranates,  besides  shrubs,  which  were 
not  vines,  but  still  produced  berries  whereof 
they  made  wine. 

167.  The  sun  of  that  earth,  which  is  to  us 
a  star,  sppears  there  flaming,  in  size  about  a 
fourth  part  of  our  sun  ;  their  year  is  nearly 
200  days,  and  each  day  15  hours,  computed 
according  to  the  length  of  days  on  our  earth  : 
the  earth  itself  is  one  of  the  least  in  the  Starry 
Heaven,  being  scarcely  500  German  miles  in 
circumference.  This  information  we  had  from 
the  angels,  who  made  a  comparison  in  all  these 


179 


particulars  with  things  of  a  like  nature  on  our 
earth,  according  to  what  they  saw  in  me,  or  in- 
my  memory  ;  their  conclusions  were  formed 
by  angelic  ideas,  whereby  are  instantly  known 
the  measures  of  spaces  and  times,  in  a  just 
proportion  with  respect  to  spaces  and  times 
elsewhere  :  angelic  ideas,  which  are  spiritual, 
in  such  calculations  infinitely  excel  human 
ideas. 


Concerning  a  Fifth  Earth  in  the  Starry  Heaven, 
its  Spirits  and  Inhabitants. 

168.  I  WAS  led  at  another  time  to  another 
earth,  which  is  in  the  universe  out  of  our  solar 
system,  and  on  this  occasion  also  by  changes 
of  state,  continued  nearly  for  twelve  hours. 
There  were  in  company  with  me  several  spirits 
and  angels  from  our  earth,  with  whom  I  dis- 
coursed in  the  way  or  progress  thither.  I  was 
carried  at  times  obliquely  upwards  and  oblique- 
ly downwards,  continually  towards  the  right, 
which  in  another  life  is  towards  the  south ; 
only  in  two  places  I  saw  spirits,  and  in  one  I 
discoursed  with  them.  In  this  journey  or  pro- 
gress it  was  given  to  observe  how  immense 
the  Lord's  heaven  is,  which  is  designed  for 
angels  and  spirits ;  for  from  the  parts  uninhab- 
ited it  was  given  to  conclude,  that  it  was  so 


180 


immense,  that  in  case  there  were  several 
myriads  of  earths,  and  on  each  earth  a  miiUi- 
tude  of  men  equal  in  number  to  the  inhabitants 
of  our  earth,  there  would  still  be  a  place  of 
abode  for  them  to  eternity,  and  it  would  never 
be  filled.  This  I  was  enabled  to  conclude 
from  a  comparison  made  with  the  extent  of 
the  heaven  which  is  about  our  earth  and  de- 
signed for  it,  which  extent  was  respectively  so 
small,  that  it  did  not  equal  one  ten  thousandth 
thousandth  part  of  the  extent  uninhabited. 

169.  When  the  angelic  spirits,  who  were 
from  that  earth,  came  into  view,  they  accosted 
us,  asking  who  we  were,  and  what  we  wanted  ? 
We  said,  that  we  came  for  the  sake  of  jour- 
neying, and  that  we  were  directed  thither,  and 
that  they  had  nothing  to  fear  from  us :  for  they 
were  afraid  we  were  of  those  who  disturb 
them  in  regard  to  God,  to  faith,  and  things  of 
a  like  nature,  on  account  of  whom  they  had 
betaken  themselves  to  that  quarter  of  their 
earth,  shunning  them  as  much  as  possible.  We 
asked  them  in  what  particulars  they  were  dis- 
turbed? They  replied,  by  an  idea  of  three,  and 
by  an  idea  of  a  divine  principle  without  a  hu- 
man, in  God,  when  yet  they  knew  and  per- 
ceived that  God  is  one,  and  that  he  is  a  man. 
It  was  then  perceived  by  us,  that  they  who 
disturbed  them,  and  whom  they  shunned,  were 
from  our  earth ;  this  was  manifest  also  from  this 


181 


consideration,  that  there  are  spirits  from  our 
earth,  who  thus  wander  about  in  another  hfe, 
in  consequence  of  their  fondness  for  and  de- 
hght  in  travelhng,  wliichthey  have  contracted  in 
the  world ;  for  on  other  earths  there  is  no  such 
custom  of  travelling  as  on  our's.  It  was  after- 
wards discovered  that  they  were  monks,  who 
had  travelled  on  our  globe  from  a  desire  of 
converting  the  Gentiles  :  wherefore  we  told 
them,  that  they  did  well  to  shun  such  spirits, 
because  their  intention  was  not  to  teach,  but  to 
secure  gain  and  dominion ;  and  that  they  study 
by  various  arts  first  to  captivate  men's  minds, 
but  afterwards  to  subject  them  to  themselves 
as  slaves  :  moreover,  that  they  did  well  in  not 
suffering  their  ideas  concerning  God  to  be  dis- 
turbed by  such.  They  informed  us  further, 
that  the  above  spirits  confuse  them  by  asserting, 
that  they  ought  to  have  faith  and  to  believe 
the  things  they  declare  ;  but  that  their  reply 
to  this  was,  that  they  knew  not  what  faith 
or  believing  meant,  since  they  perceive  in 
themselves  whether  a  thing  be  true  or  not : 
they  were  of  the  Lord's  celestial  kingdom, 
where  all  know  by  an  interior  perception  the 
truths,  which  with  us  are  called  the  truths  of 
faith,  for  they  are  in  illumination  from  the 
Lord  ;  but  it  is  otherwise  with  those  who  are 
in  the  spiritual  kingdom.  That  the  angelic 
spirits  of  that  earth  were  of  the  Lord's  celestial 
36 


182 


kingdom,  it  was  given  also  to  see  from  the 
flaming  principle,  whence  their  ideas  flowed  ; 
for  the  hght  in  the  celestial  kingdom  is  flaming, 
and  in  the  spiritual  kingdom  it  is  white.  They 
who  are  of  the  celestial  kingdom,  when  the 
discourse  is  about  truths,  say  no  more  than 
yea,  yea,  or  nay,  nay,  and  never  reason  about 
truths  whether  they  be  so  or  not ;  tliese  are 
they  of  whom  the  Lord  speaks  in  these  words, 
"  Let  your  discourse  be  yea  yea,  nay  nay,  for 
whatsoever  is  more  than  this  cometh  of  evil." 
Hence  it  was  that  those  spirits  said,  that  they 
did  not  know  what  is  meant  by  having  faith  or 
believing  ;  they  consider  an  exhortation  to  be- 
lieve, like  a  person's  saying  to  his  companion, 
who  sees  houses  or  trees  with  his  own  eyes, 
that  he  ought  to  have  faith  or  to  believe  that 
they  are  houses  and  trees,  when  he  sees  clearh^ 
that  they  are  so  :  such  are  they  who  are  of  the 
Lord's  celestial  kingdom,  and  such  were  these 
angelic  spirits.  ( ana )  We  told  them,  that  there 
(aaa)  That  heaven  is  distinguished  into  two 
kingdoms,  one  of  which  is  called  the  celestial 
kingdom,  the  other  the  spiritual  kingdom,  n. 
3887,  4138.  That  the  angels  in  the  celestial 
kingdom  have  vastly  more  knowledge  and  wis- 
dom than  the  angels  in  the  spiritual  kingdom,  n. 
2718.  That  the  celestial  angels  do  not  think 
and  speak  from  a  ground  of  faith,  like  the  spirit- 
ual angels,  but  from  an  internal  perception  that 
a  thing  is  so,  n,  202,  397,  607,  784,  1121,  1387, 


183 

are  few  on  our  earth  who  have  interior  per- 
ception, by  reason  that  they  learn  truths  in 
their  youth,  and  do  not  practise  them  :  for 
man  has  two  faculties,  which  are  called  un- 
derstanding and  will ;  they  who  admit  truths 
no  further  than  into  the  memory,  and  thence 
in  some  small  degree  into  the  understanding, 
and  not  into  the  hfe,  that  is,  into  the  will,  these, 
inasmuch  as  they  are  not  capable  of  any  illu- 
mination or  interior  sight  from  the  Lord,  say 
that  those  truths  are  to  be  believed,  or  that 
they  are  objects  of  faith,  and  also  reason 
concerning  them  whether  they  be  truths  or 
not,  yea,  they  are  not  willing  that  they  should 
be  perceived  by  any  interior  sight,  or  by  a 
kind  of  illumination  in  the  understanding  ;  they 
say  this,  because  truths  with  them  are  without 
light  from  heaven,  and  to  those  who  see  with- 
out light  from  heaven,  what  is  false  may  ap- 
pear hke  what  is  true,  and  what  is  true  like 
what  is  false ;  hence  so  great  blindness  has 
seized  several  on  our  earth,  that  although  they 
do  not  practise  truths,  or  live  according  to 
them,  still  they  say  that  they  may  be  saved  by 
faith  alone,  as  if  it  were  the  mere  knowledge 

1398,  1442,  1919,  7680,  7877,  8780.  That  the 
celestial  angels  say  only  concerning  the  truths  of 
faith  yea  yea,  or  nay  nay,  but  that  the  spiritual 
angels  reason  whether  it  be  so  or  not  so,  n.  202, 
337,  2715,  3246,  4448,  9196. 


184 


of  things  appertaining  to  faith  which  constituted 
man,  and  not  a  life  according  to  that  knowledge. 
We  afterwards  discoursed  with  them  concern- 
ing the  Lord,  concerning  love  to  him,  con- 
cerning neighbourly  love,  and  concerning 
regeneration  ;  in  regard  to  the  Lord  we  said, 
that  to  love  him  is  to  love  the  commandments 
which  are  from  him,  which  is  from  a  principle 
of  love  to  do  those  commandments  ;  (hbh )  in 
regard  to  neighbourly  love,  that  it  consists  in 
willing  good  and  thence  doing  good  to  a  fel- 
low-citizen, to  a  man's  country,  to  the  church, 
or  to  the  Lord's  kingdom,  not  with  a  view  to 
vain  applause,  or  to  establish  self-merit,  but 
from  an  affection  of  good,  (ccc)  Concerning 
regeneration  we  observed,  that  they  who  are 
regenerated  by  the  Lord,  and  commit  truths 
immediately  to  life,  come  into  an  interior  per- 
ception concerning  them  ;  but  that  they  who 
receive  truths  first  in  the  memory,  and  after- 
wards will  them  and  do  them,  are  they  who 

(bbb )  That  to  love  the  Lord  is  to  live  accord- 
ing to  his  commandments,  n.  10143,  10153, 
10310,  10578,  10648. 

(ccc )  That  neighbourly  love  consists  in  doing 
what  is  good,  just,  and  right,  in  every  work  and 
in  every  function,  from  an  alfection  of  what  is 
good,  just,  and  right,  n.  8120,  8121,  8122,  10310, 
10336.  That  a  life  of  neighbourly  love  is  a  life 
according  to  the  Lord's  commandments,  n.  3249. 


185 


are  principled  in  faith,  for  they  act  from  a 
principle  of  faith,  which  is  then  called  con- 
science. They  said  that  they  perceived  tliese 
things  to  be  so,  consequently  they  perceived 
also  what  faith  is.  I  discoursed  with  them  by 
spiritual  ideas,  whereby  such  things  may  be 
exhibited  and  comprehended  in  light. 

170.  These  spirits,  with  whom  I  now  dis- 
coursed, were  from  the  northern  part  of  their 
earth;  I  was  afterwards  led  to  those  who  were 
on  the  western  part;  these  also  being  desirous 
to  discover  who  and  what  I  was,  immediately 
said,  that  there  was  nothing  in  me  but  evil, 
thinking  thus  to  deter  me  from  approaching 
nearer  ;  it  was  given  me  to  perceive,  that  this 
was  their  manner  of  accosting  all  who  come 
to  them ;  and  it  was  given  me  to  reply,  that  I 
well  knew  it  to  be  so,  and  that  in  them  also 
there  was  nothing  but  evil,  by  reason  that  every 
one  is  born  to  evil,  and  therefore  whatever 
comes  from  man,  spirit,  or  angel,  as  from  his 
own,  or  from  propriety,  is  nothing  but  evil, 
inasmuch  as  all  good  in  every  one  is  from  the 
Lord  :  hence  they  perceived  that  I  was  in  the 
truth,  and  I  was  admitted  to  discourse  with 
them.  They  then  shewed  me  their  idea  con  - 
cerning evil  in  man,  and  concerning  good  from 
the  Lord,  how  they  are  separated  from  each 
other  ;  they  placed  one  near  the  other,  almost 
contiguous,  but  still  distinct,  yet  as  it  were 
37 


1S6 


bound  in  a  manner  inexpressible,  so  that  the 
good  led  the  evil,  and  restrained  it,  insomuch 
tliat  it  was  not  allowed  it  to  act  at  pleasure, 
and  thus  the  good  bended  the  evil  in  whatever 
direction  it  desired,  without  the  evil  knowing 
any  thing  of  it :  in  this  manner  they  exhibited 
the  dominion  of  good  over  evil,  and  at  the  same 
time  a  state  of  freedom.    They  then  asked, 
how  the  Lord  appeared  amongst  the  angels 
from  our  earth  ?  1  said,  that  he  appeared  in 
the  sun,  as  a  man,  encompassed  therein  with 
a  fiery  solar  principle,  whence  the  angels  in 
the  heavens  derive  all  hght,  and  that  tlie  heat 
which  proceeds  thence  is  divine  good,  and  that 
the  hght  which  proceeds  thence  is  divine  truth, 
each  originating  in  the  divine  love,  which  is 
the  fiery  principle  appearing  around  the  Lord 
in  that  sun ;  but  that  that  sun  only  appears  to 
the  angels  in  heaven,  and  not  to  the  spirits 
who  are  beneath,  since  they  are  more  removed 
from  the  reception  of  the  good  of  love  and  of 
the  truth  of  faith,  than  the  angels  who  are  in 
the  heavens,  see  above,  n.  40.    It  was  given 
them  thus  to  inquire  concerning  the  Lord,  and 
concerning  his  appearance  before  the  angels 
from  our  earth,  inasmuch  as  it  pleased  the 
Lord  at  that  instant  to  present  himself  before 
them,  and  to  reduce  into  order  the  things  which 
had  been  disturbed  by  the  evil  spirits,  of  whom 
they  complained  ;  this  also  was  the  reason  why 


187 


I  was  led  thither,  that  I  might  be  an  eye-wit- 
ness of  these  things. 

171.  There  was  then  seen  an  obscure  cloud 
towards  the  east  descending  from  on  high, 
which  in  its  descent  appeared  by  degrees 
bright  and  in  a  human  form  ;  at  length  the 
human  form  appeared  in  beams  of  flaming  lus- 
tre, encompassed  with  small  stars  of  the  same 
radiance  :  thus  the  Lord  presented  himself 
before  the  spirits  with  whom  I  was  discoursing. 
At  his  presence  all  the  spirits  thereabouts  were 
instantly  gathered  together  from  all  sides,  and 
when  they  were  come,  they  were  separated, 
the  good  from  the  evil,  the  good  to  the  right 
and  the  evil  to  the  left,  and  this  in  an  iubisui 
as  of  their  own  accord  ;  and  those  on  the  right 
were  arranged  in  order  according  to  the  nature 
and  quality  of  their  good,  and  those  on  the  left 
according  to  the  nature  and  quality  of  their 
evil ;  and  they  who  were  good  were  left  to 
form  amongst  themselves  a  celestial  society, 
but  the  evil  were  cast  into  the  hells.  After- 
wards I  saw  that  those  beams  of  flaming  lustre 
descended  to  the  lower  parts  of  the  earth 
thereabouts  to  a  considerable  depth,  and  then 
they  appeared  at  one  time  in  a  flaming  lustre 
verging  to  lucidity,  at  another  time  in  a  lucidity 
verging  to  obscurity,  and  lastly  in  obscurity  ; 
and  I  was  told  by  the  angels,  that  that  appear- 
ance is  according  to  the  reception  of  truth 
33 


188 


from  good,  and  of  the  false  principle  from  evil, 

with  those  who  inhabit  the  lower  parts  of  that 
earth,  and  that  the  beams  of  flaming  lustre 
themselves  were  subject  to  no  such  variable- 
ness. I  was  told  also,  that  the  lower  parts  of 
that  earth  were  inhabited  both  by  the  good 
and  by  the  evil,  but  that  they  were  carefully 
separated,  to  the  intent  that  the  evil  might  be 
ruled  by  the  good  from  the  Lord  ;  the  angels 
added,  that  the  good  were  by  turns  elevated 
thence  into  heaven  by  the  Lord,  and  that  others 
succeeded  in  their  place,  and  so  on  perpetually. 
In  that  descent,  the  good  were  separated  from 
the  evil  in  like  manner  as  above,  and  all  things 
were  reduced  to  order  ;  for  the  evil,  by  various 
arts  and  cunning  contrivances,  had  insinuated 
themselves  into  the  dwellings  of  the  good  there, 
and  had  infested  them  ;  and  this  was  the  cause 
of  the  present  visitation.  That  cloud,  which 
in  descending  appeared  by  degrees  bright  and 
in  a  human  form,  and  afterwards  as  beams  of 
flaming  lustre,  was  an  angelic  society  with  the 
Lord  in  the  midst.  Hence  it  was  given  to 
know  what  is  meant  by  the  Lord's  words  in 
the  EvangeHsts,  where  speaking  of  the  last 
judgment  he  says,  "That  he  should  come 
with  the  angels  in  the  clouds  of  heaven,  with 
glory  and  power." 

1'72.  Afterwards  there  were  seen  some 
monkish  spirits,  viz.  such  as  had  been  travel- 


189 


ling  monks  or  missionaries  in  the  world,  of 
whom  mention  was  made  above;  and  there 
was  also  seen  a  crowd  of  spirits,  who  were  from 
that  earth,  several  of  them  evil,  whom  the 
monkish  spirits  had  seduced  and  drawn  over  to 
favour  their  opinions.  These  were  seen  on 
the  eastern  side  of  that  earth,  from  whence 
they  drove  away  the  good,  who  betook  them- 
selves to  the  northern  side  of  the  earth,  of 
whom  we  have  spoken  above.  That  crowd 
with  their  seducers  was  collected  into  one 
body,  amounting  to  some  thousands,  and  was 
separated,  when  the  evil  were  cast  into  the 
hells.  It  was  given  me  to  discourse  with  one 
spirit  who  was  a  monk,  and  to  ask  him  what 
he  did  there?  He  replied,  that  he  taught 
them  concerning  the  Lord.  I  asked,  what 
beside?  He  said,  concerning  heaven  and  hell. 
I  asked,  what  further?  He  said,  concerning  a 
belief  in  all  that  he  should  say.  I  asked  again, 
if  he  taught  any  thing  else?  He  said,  concern- 
ing the  power  of  remitting  sins,  and  of  opening 
and  shutting  heaven.  He  was  then  examined 
as  to  what  he  knew  concerning  the  Lord,  con- 
cerning the  truths  of  faith,  concerning  the  re- 
mission of  sins,  concerning:  man's  salvation,  and 
concerning  heaven  and  hell,  and  it  was  disco- 
vered that  he  knew  scarce  any  thing,  and  that 
he  was  in  an  obscure  and  false  principle  con- 
cerning all  and  singular  the  truths  appertaining 


190 


to  the  above  subjects;  and  that  he  was  possess- 
ed solely  by  the  lust  of  gain  and  dominion, 
which  he  had  contracted  in  the  world,  and 
brought  with  him  thence ;  wherefore  he  was 
told,  that  inasmuch  as  he  had  travelled  so  far 
as  that  earth  under  the  instigation  of  that  lust, 
and  was  so  very  ignorant  in  points  of  doctrine, 
he  must  needs  deprive  the  spirits  of  that  earth 
of  celestial  light,  and  cause  in  them  the  dark- 
ness of  hell,  and  thus  bring  them  under  the 
dominion  of  hell,  and  not  of  the  Lord.  More- 
over he  was  cunning  and  crafty  to  seduce 
others,  but  dull  and  stupid  as  to  the  things  of 
heaven ;  wherefore  he  was  cast  thence  into  hell. 
Thus  the  spirits  of  that  earth  were  set  at  hberty 
from  those  monkish  spirits. 

173.  The  spirits  of  that  earth  mentioned 
also,  amongst  other  particulars,  that  those 
strangers,  who,  as  has  been  said,  were  monk- 
ish spirits,  used  all  their  endeavours  to  per- 
suade them  to  live  in  society,  and  not  separate 
and  solitary :  for  spirhs  and  angels  dwell  and 
cohabit  in  hke  manner  as  in  the  world;  they 
who  have  dwelt  in  a  collected  state  in  the  world, 
dwell  also  in  a  collected  state  in  another  life, 
and  they  who  have  dwelt  in  a  separate  state, 
divided  into  houses  and  families,  dwell  also  in 
a  separate  state  in  another  life.  These  spirits, 
on  their  earth,  whilst  they  lived  there  as  men, 
had  dwelt  in  a  separate  state,  house  and  house, 


191 


families  and  families,  and  thus  nation  and  na- 
tion apart,  and  hence  they  knew  not  what  it 
was  to  dwell  together  in  society ;  wherefore 
when  it  was  told  them  that  those  strangers 
wished  to  persuade  them  to  dwell  in  society, 
to  the  intent  that  they  might  reign  and  rule  over 
them,  and  that  they  could  not  otherwise  subject 
them  to  themselves,  and  make  them  slaves,  they 
replied,  that  they  were  totally  ignorant  what  was 
meant  by  reigning  and  ruling.  That  they  fly 
away  at  the  very  idea  of  rule  and  dominion, 
was  made  manifest  to  me  from  this  circum- 
stance, that  one  of  them,  who  accompanied  us 
back  again,  when  I  shewed  him  the  city  in 
which  I  dwelt,  at  the  first  sight  of  it  fled  away, 
and  was  no  longer  seen. 

174.  I  then  discoursed  with  the  attendant 
angels  concerning  dominion,  observing,  that 
there  were  two  kinds  of  dominion,  one  of  neigh- 
bourly love,  and  the  other  of  self-love;  and 
that  the  dominion  of  neighbourly  love  has  place 
amongst  those,  who  dwell  separated  into  houses, 
families,  and  nations ;  whereas  the  dominion  of 
self-love  has  place  amongst  those  who  dwell 
together  in  society.  Amongst  those  who  live 
separated  into  houses,  families,  and  nations,  he 
has  dominion  who  is  the  father  of  the  nation, 
and  under  him  the  fathers  of  famihes,  and  un- 
der these  the  fathers  of  each  particular  house. 
He  is  called  the  father  of  the  nation,  in  whom 


192 


the  families  originate,  from  which  families  the 

houses  are  derived;  but  all  these  exercise  a 
dominion  of  love,  like  that  of  a  father  towards 
his  children,  who  teaches  them  how  they  ought 
to  live,  provides  for  their  good  to  the  utmost 
of  his  power,  and  distributes  amongst  them  all 
that  he  possesses;  whilst  it  never  enters  into 
1  is  mind  to  subject  them  to  himself  as  subjects, 
or  as  servants,  but  he  loves  that  they  should 
obey  him  as  children  obey  their  father;  and 
inasmuch  as  this  love  increases  in  descending, 
as  is  generally  known,  therefore  the  father  of 
the  nation  acts  from  a  principle  of  more  inward 
love  than  the  father  himself,  from  whom  the 
children  are  next  descended.  Such  also  is  the 
dominion  which  has  place  in  the  heavens,  in- 
asmuch as  such  is  the  Lord's  dominion ;  for 
his  dominion  is  grounded  in  a  principle  of  di- 
vine love  towards  the  whole  human  race. 
But  the  dominion  of  self-love,  which  is  oppo- 
site to  the  dominion  of  neighbourly  love,  began 
when  man  ahenated  himself  from  the  Lord ; 
for  in  proportion  as  man  does  not  love  and 
worship  the  Lord,  in  the  same  proportion  he 
loves  and  worships  himself,  and  in  the  same 
proportion  also  he  loves  the  world.  Then  it 
was,  that,  compelled  by  motives  of  self-preser- 
vation and  security  from  injustice,  nations  con- 
sisting of  famihes  and  houses  cemented  them- 
-elves  into  one  body,  and  established  govern- 


193 


ments  under  various  forms;  for  in  proportion 
as  self-love  increased,  in  the  same  proportion 
all  kinds  of  evil,  as  enmity,  envy,  hatred,  re- 
venge cruelty,  and  deceit,  increased  with  it, 
being  exercised  towards  all  who  opposed  that 
love;  for  from  man's  propriety,  or  selfhood, 
which  has  rule  in  those  who  are  principled  in 
self-love,  nothing  but  evil  springs,  inasmuch  as 
man's  propriety  or  selfhood  is  nothing  else  but 
mere  evil,  and  of  consequence  is  not  receptive 
of  any  good  from  heaven ;  hence  self-love, 
whilst  it  has  dominion,  is  the  father  of  all  such 
evils ;  [ddd)  and  it  is  also  a  love  of  such  a  na- 

( ddd)  That  man's  propriety,  or  selfhood,  which 
he  derives  from  his  parents,  is  nothing  but  dense 
evil,  n.  210,  215,  731,  874,  876,  987, 1047,  2307, 
23 1 8, 35 1 8,  370 1 , 38 1 2, 8480, 8550, 1 0283, 1 0284, 
10286,  10731.  That  man's  propriety,  or  self- 
hood, consists  in  loving  himself  more  than  God, 
and  the  world  more  than  heaven,  and  in  making 
light  of  his  neighbour  in  respect  to  himself,  ex- 
cept it  be  for  the  sake  of  himself,  and  thus  from 
motives  of  self-love  and  the  love  of  the  world, 
n.  694,  731,  4317,  5660.  That  all  evils  flow 
from  self-love  and  the  love  of  the  world,  when 
they  have  dominion,  n.  1307,  1308,  1321,  1594, 
1691,  3413, 7255,  7376,  7480,  7488,  8318,  9335, 
9348,  10038,  10742.  These  evils  are  contempt 
of  others,  enmity,  hatred,  revenge,  cruelty,  and 
deceit,  n.  6667,  7372,  7373,  7374,  9348,  10038, 
10742.  And  that  from  these  evils  every  false 
principle  flows,  n.  1047,  10283,  10284,  10286, 


194 


ture,  that  where  it  is  left  without  restraint,  it 

grasps  at  an  universal  dominion  over  the  whole 
earth,  and  wishes  to  possess  the  property  of 
all;  nay  it  is  not  even  content  with  this,  but 
would  have  dominion  over  heaven  also,  as  may 
appear  from  the  example  of  modern  Babylon. 
Such  then  is  the  dominion  of  self-love,  from 
which  the  dominion  of  neighbourly  love  differs 
as  much  as  heaven  does  from  hell.  But  not- 
withstanding the  dominion  of  self-love  is  such 
in  societies,  or  in  kingdoms  and  empires,  there 
is  still  existing  a  dominion  of  neighbourly  love, 
even  in  those  collective  bodies  of  men,  with 
those  who  are  wise  from  a  principle  of  faith 
and  love  towards  God,  for  such  love  their 
neighbour.  That  such  also  in  the  heavens 
dwell  distinct  as  to  nations,  families,  and  houses, 
ahhough  in  societies  together,  but  according  to 
spiritual  affinities,  which  have  relation  to  the 
good  of  love  and  the  truth  of  faith,  bj"  the  divine 
mercy  of  the  Lord  will  be  shewn  elsewhere. 

175.  I  afterwards  questioned  those  spirits 
concerning  various  particulars  in  regard  to  the 
earth  from  whence  they  came,  and  first,  con- 
cerning their  divine  worship,  and  concerning 
revelation.  In  regard  to  divine  worship,  they 
said,  that  nations  with  their  families  every 
thirtieth  day  meet  together  in  one  place,  and 
hear  preaching  ;  and  that  the  preacher  on  those 
occasions,  from  a  pulpit  a  little  raised  from  the 
ground,  teaches  them  divine  truths  which  lead 


195 


to  the  good  of  life.  In  regard  to  revelation, 
they  said,  that  it  is  communicated  early  in  the 
morning,  in  a  state  between  sleeping  and  wak- 
ing, when  they  are  in  interior  light  not  as  yet 
disturbed  by  the  bodily  senses  and  by  worldly 
things  ;  and  that  on  such  occasions  they  hear 
the  angels  of  heaven  discoursing  concerning 
divine  truths,  and  concerning  a  hfe  in  conform- 
ity thereto  ;  and  that  when  they  are  awake, 
an  angel  appears  to  them  in  a  while  garment 
by  the  bed-side,  and  then  suddenly  vanishes 
out  of  sight ;  and  that  hereby  they  know  that 
what  they  heard  was  from  heaven  :  thus  divine 
vision  is  distinguished  from  vision  not  divine, 
for  in  vision  not  divine  no  angel  appears.  They 
added,  that  in  this  manner  revelations  are 
made  to  their  preachers,  and  sometimes  also 
to  others. 

176.  On  questioning  them  concerning  their 
houses,  they  said,  that  they  were  low,  being 
built  of  wood,  with  a  flat  roof,  having  a  cornish 
sloping  downwards  ;  and  that  in  front  dwelt 
the  husband  and  wife,  in  the  next  chamber 
the  children,  and  the  men-servants  and  maid- 
servants to  the  back.  In  regard  to  food,  they 
said,  that  they  drink  milk  with  water  ;  and 
that  they  have  milk  from  cows,  which  are 
woolly  like  sheep.  Concerning  their  manner 
of  life,  they  said,  that  they  go  naked,  and  that 


196 


they  are  not  ashamed  of  it ;  also  that  their  con- 
nexions are  with  those  of  their  own  families. 

177.  In  regard  to  the  sun  of  that  earth,  they 
related,  that  it  appears  to  the  inhabitants  of  a 
flaming  colour ;  that  the  length  of  their  years 
is  200  days,  and  that  a  day  equals  nine  hours 
of  our  time,  which  they  could  conclude  from 
the  length  of  the  days  of  our  earth  perceivable 
in  me  ;  and  further,  that  the}'  have  a  perpetual 
spring  and  summer,  and  consequently  that  the 
fields  are  ever  green,  and  the  trees  ever  bear- 
ing fruit.  The  reason  of  this  is,  because  their 
year  is  so  short,  being  equal  only  to  75  days 
of  our  time  ;  and  when  this  is  the  case,  the 
cold  does  not  continue  long  in  winter,  nor  the 
heat  in  summer,  and  of  consequence  the  ground 
is  in  a  continual  state  of  vegetation. 

178.  Concerning  the  ceremonies  prepara- 
tory to  and  attending  marriage,  they  related, 
that  a  daughter,  when  she  arrives  at  a  mar- 
riageable age,  is  kept  at  home,  nor  is  she  al- 
lowed to  leave  the  house  till  the  day  she  is  to 
be  married  ;  and  that  then  she  is  conducted  to 
a  certain  connubial  house,  where  there  are  also 
several  other  young  women,  arrived  at  the 
same  age,  brought  together,  and  there  they  are 
placed  behind  a  screen  which  reaches  to  the 
middle  of  the  body,  so  that  they  appear  naked 
as  to  the  breast  and  face  :  and  that  on  such 


197 


occasions  the  young  men  come  thither,  to 
choose  for  themselves  a  wife ;  and  when  a 
young  man  sees  a  young  woman  that  seems 
to  suit  him,  and  to  whom  his  mind  inchnes  him, 
he  takes  her  by  the  hand  ;  and  if  she  then 
follows  him,  he  leads  her  to  a  house  prepared 
for  the  purpose,  and  she  becomes  his  wife ;  for 
they  discover  from  the  face  whether  they  agree 
in  mind,  inasmuch  as  every  one's  face  on  that 
earth  is  an  index  of  the  mind,  being  free  from 
deceit  and  dissimulation.  For  the  preserva- 
tion of  decency,  and  to  suppress  lasciviousness, 
an  old  man  is  seated  behind  the  young  women, 
and  an  old  woman  at  the  side  of  them,  to  make 
their  observations.  There  are  several  such 
places  to  which  the  young  women  are  con- 
ducted ;  and  also  stated  times  for  the  young 
men  to  make  their  choice  ;  for  if  they  do  not 
find  a  young  woman  to  suit  them  in  one  place, 
they  go  to  another ;  and  if  not  at  one  time, 
they  return  again  at  a  future  time.  They  said 
further,  that  a  husband  has  only  one  wife, 
and  in  no  case  more  than  one,  because  to  have 
more  than  one  is  contrary  to  divine  order. 


39 


